Universal Avionics Systems 10801 Avionics Communication Management Unit User Manual 23 20 06x

Universal Avionics Systems Corporation Avionics Communication Management Unit 23 20 06x

Users Manual 6

3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
(520) 295-2300 • (800) 321-5253 23-20-06 15 December 2011
UL-801
Installation Manual
The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation
(“EAR”), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
This publication is available at www.uasc.com.
© 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
R
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Record of Revisions
Rev No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials
UASC
Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages
according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date,
insertion date and your initials.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Record of Temporary Changes
Change
No.
Page No.
Issue Date Insertion Date &
Initials
Removal Date/Initials/Reason
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your
initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 2
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Record of Temporary Changes (Continued)
Change
No.
Page No.
Issue Date Insertion Date &
Initials
Removal Date/Initials/Reason
Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into
manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your
initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
List of Effective Pages
Subject Page
Date
Title Page 15 Dec 2011
Record of Revisions 1 15 Dec 2011
Record of Temporary
Changes
1 15 Dec 2011
2 15 Dec 2011
List of Effective
Pages
1 15 Dec 2011
2 15 Dec 2011
3 15 Dec 2011
Table of Contents 1 15 Dec 2011
2 15 Dec 2011
3 15 Dec 2011
4 15 Dec 2011
Introduction 1 15 Dec 2011
Description and
Operation
1 15 Dec 2011
2 15 Dec 2011
3 15 Dec 2011
4 15 Dec 2011
5 15 Dec 2011
6 15 Dec 2011
7 15 Dec 2011
8 15 Dec 2011
9 15 Dec 2011
10 15 Dec 2011
11 15 Dec 2011
12 15 Dec 2011
13 15 Dec 2011
14 15 Dec 2011
15 15 Dec 2011
16 15 Dec 2011
17 15 Dec 2011
18 15 Dec 2011
19 15 Dec 2011
20 15 Dec 2011
21 15 Dec 2011
22 15 Dec 2011
23 15 Dec 2011
24 15 Dec 2011
Subject Page
Date
25 15 Dec 2011
26 15 Dec 2011
27 15 Dec 2011
28 15 Dec 2011
29 15 Dec 2011
30 15 Dec 2011
31 15 Dec 2011
32 15 Dec 2011
FAA Approval 101 15 Dec 2011
102 15 Dec 2011
103 15 Dec 2011
104 15 Dec 2011
105 15 Dec 2011
106 15 Dec 2011
107 15 Dec 2011
108 15 Dec 2011
109 15 Dec 2011
110 15 Dec 2011
111 15 Dec 2011
112 15 Dec 2011
113 15 Dec 2011
114 15 Dec 2011
115 15 Dec 2011
116 15 Dec 2011
Equipment
Specifications
201 15 Dec 2011
202 15 Dec 2011
203 15 Dec 2011
204 15 Dec 2011
205 15 Dec 2011
206 15 Dec 2011
207 15 Dec 2011
208 15 Dec 2011
209 15 Dec 2011
210 15 Dec 2011
211 15 Dec 2011
212 15 Dec 2011
Installation and
Wiring 301 15 Dec 2011
302 15 Dec 2011
303 15 Dec 2011
304 15 Dec 2011
305 15 Dec 2011
306 15 Dec 2011
307 15 Dec 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 2
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Subject Page
Date
308 15 Dec 2011
309 15 Dec 2011
310 15 Dec 2011
311 15 Dec 2011
312 15 Dec 2011
313 15 Dec 2011
314 15 Dec 2011
315 15 Dec 2011
316 15 Dec 2011
317 15 Dec 2011
318 15 Dec 2011
319 15 Dec 2011
320 15 Dec 2011
321 15 Dec 2011
322 15 Dec 2011
323 15 Dec 2011
324 15 Dec 2011
325 15 Dec 2011
326 15 Dec 2011
327 15 Dec 2011
328 15 Dec 2011
329 15 Dec 2011
330 15 Dec 2011
331 15 Dec 2011
332 15 Dec 2011
333 15 Dec 2011
334 15 Dec 2011
335 15 Dec 2011
336 15 Dec 2011
337 15 Dec 2011
338 15 Dec 2011
339 15 Dec 2011
340 15 Dec 2011
341 15 Dec 2011
342 15 Dec 2011
343 15 Dec 2011
344 15 Dec 2011
345 15 Dec 2011
346 15 Dec 2011
347 15 Dec 2011
348 15 Dec 2011
System Data
Installation 401 15 Dec 2011
402 15 Dec 2011
403 15 Dec 2011
404 15 Dec 2011
405 15 Dec 2011
406 15 Dec 2011
407 15 Dec 2011
408 15 Dec 2011
409 15 Dec 2011
Subject Page
Date
410 15 Dec 2011
411 15 Dec 2011
412 15 Dec 2011
413 15 Dec 2011
414 15 Dec 2011
415 15 Dec 2011
416 15 Dec 2011
417 15 Dec 2011
418 15 Dec 2011
419 15 Dec 2011
420 15 Dec 2011
421 15 Dec 2011
422 15 Dec 2011
423 15 Dec 2011
424 15 Dec 2011
425 15 Dec 2011
426 15 Dec 2011
427 15 Dec 2011
428 15 Dec 2011
429 15 Dec 2011
430 15 Dec 2011
431 15 Dec 2011
432 15 Dec 2011
433 15 Dec 2011
434 15 Dec 2011
435 15 Dec 2011
436 15 Dec 2011
437 15 Dec 2011
438 15 Dec 2011
439 15 Dec 2011
440 15 Dec 2011
441 15 Dec 2011
442 15 Dec 2011
443 15 Dec 2011
444 15 Dec 2011
445 15 Dec 2011
446 15 Dec 2011
447 15 Dec 2011
448 15 Dec 2011
449 15 Dec 2011
450 15 Dec 2011
451 15 Dec 2011
452 15 Dec 2011
453 15 Dec 2011
Maintenance,
Checkout, and
Troubleshooting
501 15 Dec 2011
502 15 Dec 2011
503 15 Dec 2011
504 15 Dec 2011
505 15 Dec 2011
506 15 Dec 2011
507 15 Dec 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 3
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Subject Page
Date
508 15 Dec 2011
509 15 Dec 2011
510 15 Dec 2011
511 15 Dec 2011
512 15 Dec 2011
513 15 Dec 2011
514 15 Dec 2011
515 15 Dec 2011
516 15 Dec 2011
517 15 Dec 2011
518 15 Dec 2011
519 15 Dec 2011
Appendix 1 A1-1 15 Dec 2011
A1-2 15 Dec 2011
A1-3 15 Dec 2011
A1-4 15 Dec 2011
A1-5 15 Dec 2011
Appendix 2 A2-1 15 Dec 2011
A2-2 15 Dec 2011
A2-3 15 Dec 2011
A2-4 15 Dec 2011
A2-5 15 Dec 2011
A2-6 15 Dec 2011
A2-7 15 Dec 2011
A2-8 15 Dec 2011
A2-9 15 Dec 2011
A2-10 15 Dec 2011
A2-11 15 Dec 2011
A2-12 15 Dec 2011
A2-13 15 Dec 2011
Appendix 3 A3-1 15 Dec 2011
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
CONTENTS 15 December 2011
Table of Contents
Record of Revisions ............................................................................................................. 1
Record of Temporary Revisions ........................................................................................... 1
List of Effective Pages .......................................................................................................... 1
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................. 1
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual ............................................................................... 1
A. Application ......................................................................................................... 1
B. Organization ...................................................................................................... 1
2. Abbreviations and Terminology ................................................................................. 1
3. Contact Information ................................................................................................... 1
Description and Operation .................................................................................................... 1
1. Description ................................................................................................................. 1
A. General ............................................................................................................... 2
B. Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+) ........................................................ 3
C. Field-Loadable Software and Databases ........................................................... 4
D. Field-Loadable Software Interface ..................................................................... 5
E. UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases ........................................ 5
F. UASC FMS Interface ......................................................................................... 7
G. Configuration Module ....................................................................................... 17
H. ARINC 429 Channels ...................................................................................... 17
I. RS-232/422 Serial Ports .................................................................................. 18
J. Discrete Inputs/Outputs ................................................................................... 19
K. Ethernet ........................................................................................................... 22
L. Transmission Media Management ................................................................... 22
M. VHF Management ............................................................................................ 23
N. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL) ....................................................... 24
O. SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT) ................................................................... 26
P. ACARS Message Processing .......................................................................... 27
Q. Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages ....................................... 29
R. COCKPIT Voice Recorder (CVR) .................................................................... 29
S. Printers ............................................................................................................ 30
T. Transmission Media Interfaces – Configuration Option ................................... 31
U. Text Message Processing ............................................................................... 31
V. Media Advisory Reporting Option .................................................................... 31
W. Automatic Position Reporting Option ............................................................... 31
X. OOOI Reporting/History Option ....................................................................... 31
Y. Flight Leg Transition ........................................................................................ 32
Z. Meteorological Data Reproting Option ............................................................. 32
AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat .............................................................. 32
2. Operation ................................................................................................................. 32
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 2
CONTENTS 15 December 2011
FAA Approval .................................................................................................................... 101
1. General ................................................................................................................... 101
A. Applicable TSOs .............................................................................................. 101
B. TSO Deviations ................................................................................................ 101
C. Equipment Classes .......................................................................................... 102
D. Reference Documents ..................................................................................... 102
E. Other References ............................................................................................. 103
2. Software Criticality .................................................................................................. 105
3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................ 106
A. Airworthiness Limitations ................................................................................. 107
B. Compliance ...................................................................................................... 107
4. Environmental Qualification Forms ......................................................................... 108
5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ........................................................... 112
Equipment Specifications .................................................................................................. 201
1. UniLink Equipment Specifications .......................................................................... 201
A. UniLink Part Number Matrix ............................................................................. 201
B. UniLink Installation Kit ...................................................................................... 202
C. Power Specifications ........................................................................................ 202
D. Equipment Weights .......................................................................................... 202
E. VHF Antenna Specifications ............................................................................ 202
F. Electronic Part Marking .................................................................................... 203
G. Equipment Drawings ........................................................................................ 204
H. Signal Specifications ........................................................................................ 207
I. HS-429-1 Bus – UniLink ................................................................................... 211
J. Configurable LRUs ........................................................................................... 212
Installation and Wiring ....................................................................................................... 301
1. Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting .................................................... 301
A. UniLink Mounting ............................................................................................. 301
2. Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 301
A. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C .................................................................... 302
B. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+ .................................................................. 304
C. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E .................................................................... 306
D. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp ................................................................ 308
E. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp................................................................. 310
F. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D .................................................................... 312
G. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+ .................................................................. 314
H. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F .................................................................... 316
I. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K .................................................................... 318
J. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+ .................................................................. 320
K. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L ..................................................................... 322
L. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Ew .................................................................. 323
M. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Espw .............................................................. 325
N. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Lw .................................................................. 327
O. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Fw .................................................................. 329
P. UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later) ................ 331
Q. UL-801 to EFI-890R – High Resolution ............................................................ 332
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 3
CONTENTS 15 December 2011
R. UL-801 to MFD-640 – High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later) ............. 333
S. UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) - Low Resolution ......................................... 334
T. UL-801 to MFD-640 – Low Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.7 or earlier) ........... 335
U. UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR ................................................................................... 336
V. UL-801 to DTU-100 ......................................................................................... 337
W. UL-801 to SSDTU ........................................................................................... 337
X. UL-801 to Portable DTU-100 ........................................................................... 338
Y. UL-801 to Portable SSDTU ............................................................................. 338
Z. UL-801 to Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems ............................... 339
AA. UL-801 to ARINC740/744/744A Printer ......................................................... 341
BB. UL-801 to PC Printer ..................................................................................... 342
CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer ................................................................. 342
3. UL-801 Connector Pin Identification ...................................................................... 343
A. Top Plug .......................................................................................................... 343
B. Middle Plug ..................................................................................................... 345
C. Bottom Plug ..................................................................................................... 346
4. UL-801 Connectors ................................................................................................ 347
System Data Installation ................................................................................................... 401
1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Aircraft Type Designators ........... 401
2. Configuration Worksheets ..................................................................................... 405
A. Customer/Aircraft Information.......................................................................... 406
B. System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4) ................................................. 406
C. SYS CONFIG 2/4 ............................................................................................ 424
D. SYS CONFIG 3/4 ............................................................................................ 426
3. Configuration Procedures ...................................................................................... 428
A. Starting the FMS ............................................................................................. 428
B. FANS Block Data Transmission ...................................................................... 431
C. Storing UniLink Options ................................................................................... 432
D. Configuration Edit Mode .................................................................................. 433
E. Aircraft Configuration ....................................................................................... 435
F. Clearances ...................................................................................................... 436
G. Alerts ............................................................................................................... 437
H. System Configuration 3/4 ................................................................................ 438
I. I/O Configuration ............................................................................................. 439
J. VHF Configuration ........................................................................................... 446
K. Satellite (SAT) Configuration ........................................................................... 447
L. Priority Configuration ....................................................................................... 448
M. Telephony (TEL) Configuration ....................................................................... 449
N. Position Report Configuration.......................................................................... 450
O. Configuration Review ...................................................................................... 451
Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting ................................................................. 501
1. UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures .................................................................. 501
A. Post Installation Test ....................................................................................... 501
B. Return to Service ............................................................................................. 501
C. UniLink to FMS/MCDU Communications ........................................................ 501
D. Version Check ................................................................................................. 502
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 4
CONTENTS 15 December 2011
E. Device Status ................................................................................................... 502
F. UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications................................... 502
G. UL-801 VHF Communications ......................................................................... 503
H. OOOI Sensor Test ........................................................................................... 503
I. Printer Test ...................................................................................................... 504
J. Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes .................................. 504
K. Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional) ....................................................... 504
L. Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based
Telephony System ........................................................................................... 504
M. Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT) ............................................ 505
2. Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 506
A. Pop-up Window Error Messages ..................................................................... 506
B. General Error Messages .................................................................................. 507
C. Configuration Error Messages ......................................................................... 512
D. Hidden Error/Status Messages ........................................................................ 519
Appendix 1 ...................................................................................................................... A1-1
1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms ................................................................... A1-1
Appendix 2 ...................................................................................................................... A2-1
1. UniLink Menus and Submenus – without FANS ................................................... A2-1
A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-1
B. UniLink Menu 2/2 ........................................................................................... A2-3
C. Maintenance Menu ........................................................................................ A2-4
D. Configuration Menu ........................................................................................ A2-5
2. UniLink Menus and Submenus – with FANS ........................................................ A2-6
A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-6
B. Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................... A2-10
C. Ops Menu .................................................................................................... A2-12
Appendix 3 ...................................................................................................................... A3-1
1. Datalink Service Providers ................................................................................... A3-1
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Introduction
1. Makeup and Use of This Manual
A. Application
This manual provides installation information pertaining to the UL-801.
B. Organization
This manual provides information about:
• Description of the components of the UL-801
• Environmental qualification forms
• UniLink equipment specifications
• Installation and wiring requirements
• Worksheets and procedures for installing system data including configuring the UL-801
Configuration Module
2. Abbreviations and Terminology
This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations throughout
the industry. Refer to Appendix 1 for a list of acronyms, abbreviations, and terms that are
used throughout this manual.
The front panel of the Control Display Unit/Multi-function Control Display Unit
(CDU/MCDU), part of the FMS, contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used by
the crew to operate the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name. We
bracket the legend on the key in the text. Examples: [ENTER], [A]. Line Select Keys (LSK)
are referred to by numerical order (top to bottom) and side. Text appearing on the display
may be included. Example: RETURN [5R].
3. Contact Information
Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our
Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com.
To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact
info@uasc.com.
For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Description and Operation
1. Description
The UL-801 Airborne Datalink provides an air-to-ground two-way digital datalink that meets
the need for specific air-to-ground communications. UniLink communicates with multiple
ground-based Datalink Service Providers (DSP) using a VHF radio and/or SatCom
telephony-based system. The UL-801 contains an internal VHF Data Radio (VDR).
NOTE: Both DSP and DLSP are used as acronyms for Datalink Service Providers.
The Datalink system consists minimally of an FMS, a CDU/MCDU, the UL-801, a
transmission medium, such as a VDR or SatCom, and a configuration module. The UL-801
supports connections with up to three FMSs and one remote CDU, and connections to a
VDR; and peripheral devices, such as UASC multifunction displays (MFDs) (including the
MFD-640 and Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (EFI-890R) displays) and a printer.
This Installation Manual applies to both FANS-enabled and non-FANS-enabled UniLink
systems unless otherwise noted.
UniLink capabilities include:
• Future Air Navigation System (FANS)
• Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC) messaging
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract (ADS-C)
• CVR/CVFDR Output for datalink recording
• OOOI (Out-Off-On-In) reporting
• Automatic position reporting
• Fight planning route uplinks
• Aircraft triggered events
• Clearances/Requests
− Pre-departure
− Oceanic
− Pushback
− Expected Taxi
• Textual and graphical color weather maps or depictions in both low and high resolution
formats
• Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (D-ATIS, which is sometimes referred
to as ATIS)
• Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP)
• Free Text messaging
• Special Status reports (for example, delays, ETA updates, and diversions).
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 2
23-20-06 15 December 2011
The communication links used to exchange data are Very High Frequency (VHF), including:
• The legacy Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting system (ACARS)
• Next-generation VHF digital link (VDL) Mode 2
• Satellite Communications (SatCom).
The UL-801 is designed to be interfaced with, and controlled through, a variety of Universal
Avionics Control Display Units (CDUs) or Multi-function Control Display Units (MCDUs)
that are integrated with a Universal Avionics Flight Management System (FMS). The
UL-801 can also be controlled via an MCDU with ARINC 702 FMS or 743/743A GNSS.
Uplink text messages are displayed on Universal’s CDU/MCDUs. Color graphical weather
maps may be displayed on Universal’s CDUs, MCDUs, Multi-Function Displays (MFD),
and Flat Panel Integrated Display (FPID), as well as UASC’s EFI-890Rs.
High resolution graphics ports support up to two high-resolution display devices, such as a
capable EFI-890R ND and/or an MFD-640.
UniLink is capable of simultaneously transmitting and or receiving messages on more than
one transmission link at a time (VHF and SatCom, which includes SAT and TEL). Messages
may be generated on the ground and sent to the aircraft (uplink message) or messages can be
generated from the aircraft and sent to the ground (downlink message). Downlink messages
are generated by the crew, internally by the UniLink, or any one of the peripheral units may
generate a message to be passed on to the UniLink for transmission. When UniLink receives
an uplink message, it determines if the message should be processed internally or be sent to a
peripheral device specified by a message sub-label. Messages can be predefined as ARINC
Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) messages or UniLink
supported messages, such as specialized weather requests or graphical weather maps, or text
messages routed to a printer.
The communications link connects the UniLink-equipped aircraft directly to a DSP. This
provides a general purpose communications link between the aircraft and ground computers
utilizing such first party service providers such as ARINC, SITA, and/or AVICOM. It is the
user’s decision which DSP is selected. The decision may also be based on the second-party
DSP to which the user subscribes.
In order to aid in potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports the
transmission of datalink records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 Cockpit Voice Recorder
(CVR) and a Cockpit Voice Flight Data Recorder (CVFDR).
A. General
The UL-801 provides two-way datalink for air-to-ground communications which allows
communication with a DSP for a variety of available services. In order for UniLink to be
utilized, a DSP subscription is required. Each DSP may not support all UniLink services.
Contact your DSP for a list of supported services. A list of available UniLink DSPs can be
found in Appendix 3.
UniLink communicates via one or more communication systems: VHF and/or Satellite
SatCom systems. It supports an RS-232 serial or ARINC 429 (740, 744/744A) cockpit
printer to print various uplink messages, such as a textual weather report. The UniLink also
connects to a DTU/SSDTU to allow future software and database updates.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 3
23-20-06 15 December 2011
SatCom weather graphic uplinks via circuit mode data and text weather uplinks via Short
Burst Data (SBD) or packet data mode may or may not be available, based on your selected
DSP and the SatCom equipment installed. In addition, some functions/features may only be
available through specific communications systems as described in the following table.
Communication System2
Supported Applications1
AOC Text, and
Text, Weather, and
D-ATIS
ACARS Air
Traffic Services
excluding FANS
Flight
Information
Services (FIS)3
ATC FANS
1/A+
Weather
Graphics4
VHF (VDL Mode 2 and POA) Yes Yes Yes Yes No
SatCom (UASC Aero-I) Yes Yes Yes No No
SatCom (UASC Aero-M) Yes No No No Yes
Iridium SatCom ARINC 741 Yes Yes Yes Yes4 No
Iridium SatCom RS-232 Yes No No No Yes
Inmarsat SatCom ARINC 741 Yes Yes Yes Yes4 No
Inmarsat SatCom RS-232 Yes No No No Yes
1. Check with the DSP for applicable supported applications.
2. Communication Systems must meet DO-178B Level D to be used for FANS applications.
3. The following Flight Information Services are available thru the internal VHF radio or a capable and
approved Packet Mode Data or Short Burst Data SatCom system. Contact your DSP and SatCom
manufacturer for more information.
• Pre-departure clearance
• Oceanic clearance
• D-ATIS
• TWIP
• Pushback clearance
• Expected taxi clearance
4. Check with the Iridium or Inmarsat SatCom manufacturer for current FANS approvals.
5. Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a circuit mode data
SatCom system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The older tip and ring circuit mode
data interface that was available on all previous UniLink models, UL-60X and UL-70X, has been removed.
B. Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+)
UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by a Future Air Navigation System
(FANS) 1/A+ implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance
efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity by replacing voice transmissions between crews
and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have no or
limited radar coverage. Voice transmissions will continue to be used as a reversionary means
of communication. UniLink provides a FANS-1/A+ implementation as defined in
RTCA/DO-258A and A622. FANS-1/A+ features include AFN, ADS, and CPDLC text data
transmissions.
At least one UASC FMS must be installed and operating with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later
for the UniLink FANS-1/A+ implementation. The FMS must be configured to enable FANS
data transmission and must be configured to transmit to UniLink over the UNS HS-429-1
bus.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 4
23-20-06 15 December 2011
FANS-1 is the original version of FANS developed by Boeing and FANS-A is the
corresponding version developed by Airbus. Both of these versions are interoperable with
worldwide ATC facilities and use the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System (ACARS) network. UniLink’s FANS-1/A+ implementation is designated as such
because it is functionally equivalent to, and combines many of the best features of both
Boeing’s FANS-1 and Airbus’ FANS-A implementations.
Future Air Navigation System (FANS) is principally comprised of three applications:
• Air Traffic Services ATS Facilities Notification (AFN)
AFN allows the aircraft and an ATS provider on the ground to exchange addresses, as
well as information about which FANS applications they support.
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C)
ADS-C allows multiple ATS providers to command position reports and other situational
data at regular intervals or in response to events specified by the ATS provider, such as a
change in altitude or lateral deviation. ADS-C requires no crew interaction.
• Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC)
CPDLC provides capabilities to substitute for traditional voice communications for
routine communications between a pilot and an air traffic controller. CPDLC messages
can be used to request and grant clearances, to inform the ground of the aircraft’s position
and situation, and to provide instructions to the crew, such as “Climb To Reach FL390
By 2200” or “Proceed Direct To TUNTO”.
C. Field-Loadable Software and Databases
The UniLink application software, Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases are loadable
in the field or at an authorized Universal Avionics dealer. During the software loading
process, automatic and manual version number verification procedures are performed to
ensure the compatibility of the software and database. A separate manual, 23-20-08, provides
the Field Loading procedures.
Detection of Corrupted or Partially Loaded Software
All loadable software and databases contain a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The
data-loading software function calculates a CRC upon receipt of a file and compares it to the
CRC included with the loaded data file thus rejecting any files whose contents have changed
during the loading process.
Determination of the Effects of Loading the Inappropriate Software
The system has been designed to guard against inappropriate software or database loading
based on version numbering. Loadable application software only functions with versions of
the hardware and boot software that supports the version type of software loaded. If an
incompatibility is detected during power-up checks, the system is placed into a state in which
no normal functions can occur. Only appropriate loadable databases and applications will
function with compatible versions of the main application software.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 5
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Hardware/Software Compatibility
The hardware versions are made available to the application software and are verified for
compatibility during power-up checks and during application software loading.
Restricted Access to the Field-Loading Function
The field-loading function is only enabled when the aircraft is on the ground and after a
password has been entered successfully.
UniLink Databases
The UniLink databases, consist of multiple database components including the Aeronautical
Operational Control (AOC) and Air Traffic Control (ATC) databases (required for FANS
operations) components, contains the definitions of nearly all user-interface screens, nearly
all uplink and downlink messages, a flight database that defines how data is formatted and
stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events. Database integrity is verified
by means of a 32-bit CRC at loading and during UniLink initialization.
D. Field-Loadable Software Interface
UniLink provides an interface to load the following databases and application software via
the UASC Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) or UASC Solid State Data Transfer Unit
(SSDTU). Access to the software and database loading functions are password protected and
the aircraft must be on the ground. The UASC DTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet.
The UniLink hardware contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port.
• Datalink application software
• VDR application software
• Customer database, which includes the AOC database
• ATC database
• Geographic database
UniLink provides user-interface screens that allow the user to command and monitor the
loading progression.
E. UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases
The Field Loadable Software database system provides flexibility in response to the
changing communications, navigation, and surveillance/air traffic management environment
for current and future regulations. The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and
message set can be customized by UASC to match airline or business operator’s
requirements. Each database is described below.
All UniLink systems include three databases: the Customer Database, the Air Traffic Control
(ATC) Database, and the Geographic Database, and contains the definitions of the following:
• User interface screens
• Line Select Key functions
• Message definitions for uplink and downlink messages
• A flight database, which defines how data is formatted and stored
• Event triggers used for OOOI event reporting and other responses to system events
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 6
23-20-06 15 December 2011
The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and message set can be customized to
match airline or business operator’s operational requirements. Each database is described
below.
• Customer Database
Contains screen and message definitions for Aeronautical Operational Communications
(AOC) and Air Traffic Services (ATS) applications. Contains user definitions for uplink
and downlink messaging, and a flight database that defines how data is formatted and
stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events.
A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and
during flight. The customer database also has a version number that is checked upon
loading for compatibility with the application software. If the customer database CRC
check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and provides a screen for reloading the
customer database.
NOTE: The loading of the customer database erases the ATC database from UniLink
memory. Following a load of the customer database, the ATC database must
be reloaded.
• Air Traffic Control (ATC) Database
Contains screen and message definitions for ATC applications, including the Future Air
Navigation Systems (FANS).
The system provides flexibility in response to the changing communications, navigation,
and surveillance/air traffic management environment for current and future regulations.
This database is used to define the UniLink ATC screens and message sets and is very
similar in function and purpose as the customer database.
A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and
during flight. The ATC database also has a version number that is checked upon loading
for compatibility with the application software and the customer database. If the ATC
database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and allows the user to continue
to access the functions defined by the customer database.
NOTE: Loading the ATC database does not affect the currently loaded customer
database or Geographic database.
• Geographic Database
Contains aircraft communications addressing and reporting system (ACARS) ground
station locations and corresponding ACARS VHF frequency information.
The geographic database has a 32-bit CRC that is verified upon database loading. It also
has a version number that determines its compatibility with the application software. If
the geographic database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and prevents the
user from operating UniLink with a corrupted database.
NOTE: The Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases can be installed by UASC
and can also be field-loaded using a UASC DTU-100 or SSDTU. It is
recommended that this connection be installed as updates to these databases
may be required from time to time.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 7
23-20-06 15 December 2011
F. UASC FMS Interface
The UniLink provides concurrent user interface access for up to three UASC Flight
Management Systems. The ARINC 429 interface uses the ARINC 739 protocol for display
control and ARINC 619 bit oriented file transfer protocol for file exchange between the
devices. Each UASC FMS provides a high-speed ARINC 429 channel as inputs to UniLink.
The specific channel will be specified by the configuration module, based on aircraft wiring.
Any of the general purpose ARINC 429 output buses can be configured as output bus to the
FMS. However, ARINC TX port #1 is hard set to low speed and is required by the number 1
FMS. UniLink provides an RS-422 proprietary graphics display bus interface between the
unit and each UASC CDU for low resolution graphics.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 8
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(1) UniLink interface capabilities
10 DISCRETE
INPUT DEVICES
14 DISCRETE
OUTPUT DEVICES
CONFIGURATION
MODULE
A740/744/744A
PRINTER
SERIAL PRINTER
A604 CMC
RS-232
OPEN
/
GROUND
OPEN
/
GROUND
A739 MCDU
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
IRIDIUM
/
INMARSAT SATCOM
EFI-890R
HI-RES
NAV
DISPLAY
MFD-640
HI-RES
NAV
DISPLAY
GRAPHIC SUPPORT FOR UP TO 4 DISPLAYS
SUPPORTS
UP TO 3
UASC FMSs
OR
ARINC 702A
FMC
STAN D A RD
A429
A429
ARINC
A429
RS-232
UNILINK
UL-801
ETHERNET
I/Os
DISCRETE: 10 IN
/
14 OUT
A429: 16 IN
/
8 OUT
RS-232/422: 6 IN
/
6 OUT
ETHERNET: 3 10
/
100 BASE-T
A429
RS-422
A757 CVFDR/CVR
DATA
RECORDING
DIGITAL ADC
A429A429 A429
DATA INPUT
ONE A743 GPS RECEIVER
OR A743A GNSS SENSOR
RS-422
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEMS
SOLID STATE DATA
TRANSFER UNIT (SSDTU)
*
*
DTU-100 MAY ALSO BE USED
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
A739 MCDU A739 MCDU
RS-422
GRAPHIC
SUPPORT
FOR TWO
DISPLAYS
VHF ANTENNA
A741 A741
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 9
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) UL-801 to UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #1 UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #2
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
UL-801
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
RS-232
ARINC 741
CONFIGURATION MODULE
CVR/CVFDR
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 10
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(3) UL-801 to UNS-1Esp/UNS-1Csp+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
UNS-1Esp/
UNS-1Csp+ #1 UNS-1Esp/
UNS-1Csp+ #2
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
UL-801
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
RS-232
ARINC 741
CONFIGURATION MODULE
CVR/CVFDR
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 11
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(4) UL-801 to UNS-1F/UNS-1D+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
NCU #2
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
NCU #1
UNS-1F/UNS-1D+
4/5" FPCDU
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVW XYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVW XYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
4/5" FPCDU
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
UNI UNI
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
RS-232
ARINC 741
CONFIGURATION MODULE
CVR/CVFDR
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 12
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(5) UL-801 to UNS-1L/UNS-1K+ Block Diagram – non FANS-enabled
NCU #2
UNS-1L/UNS-1K+
NCU #1
UNS-1L/UNS-1K+
UNI UNI
ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
UNIVERSAL
OPQRSTU
HIJKLMN
ABCDEFG
VWXY Z
ENTE
MSG
DAT
FUE
TUN
PRE
NEX
PWR
DIM
PER
MENU
LI
VNA
FP
DT
NA
7
4
1 2
5
8
0
9
6
3
BACK
UNIVERSAL
OPQRSTU
HIJKLMN
ABCDEFG
VWXY Z
ENTE
MSG
DAT
FUE
TUN
PRE
NEX
PWR
DIM
PER
MENU
LI
VNA
FP
DT
NA
7
4
1 2
5
8
0
9
6
3
BACK
4 FPCDU 4 FPCDU
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SYSTEM
RS-232
CONFIGURATION MODULE
ARINC 741
CVR/CVFDR
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 13
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(6) UL-801 to UNS-1Ew Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
UNS-1Ew #1 UNS-1Ew #2
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
CVR/CVFDR
UL-801
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
FANS
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
1
1
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
1
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
VHF ANTENNA
RS-232
ARINC 741
CONFIGURATION MODULE
A
R
I
N
C
7
5
7
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 14
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(7) UL-801 to UNS-1Espw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5
and later)
UNS-1Espw #1 UNS-1Espw #2
ARINC 429 HS
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
FANS UL-801
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVWXYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
1
1
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
1
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
VHF ANTENNA
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
RS-232
CONFIGURATION MODULE
ARINC 741
A
R
I
N
C
7
5
7
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 15
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(8) UL-801 to UNS-1Fw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
NCU #2
UNS-1Fw
NCU #1
UNS-1Fw
4/5" FPCDU
RS-422
ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVW XYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
UNIVERSAL
DA NA VN DT LI PR
FU F PE TU MEN NE
ABCDEFG
HIJKLMN
OPQRST
UVW XYZ
123
456
789
0
BA MS
ON/
OFF
±
ENT
4/5" FPCDU
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
1
CVR/CVFDR
1
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
1
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
UNI UNI
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
RS-232
CONFIGURATION MODULE
FANS
ARINC 741
A
R
I
N
C
7
5
7
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 16
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(9) UL-801 to UNS-1Lw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and
later)
NCU #2
UNS-1Lw
NCU #1
UNS-1Lw
UNI UNI
ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS
ARINC 429 LS
UNIVERSAL
OPQRSTU
HIJKLMN
ABCDEFG
VWXY Z
ENTE
MSG
DAT
FUE
TUN
PRE
NEX
PWR
DIM
PER
MENU
LI
VNA
FP
DT
NA
7
4
1 2
5
8
0
9
6
3
BACK
UNIVERSAL
OPQRSTU
HIJKLMN
ABCDEFG
VWXY Z
ENTE
MSG
DAT
FUE
TUN
PRE
NEX
PWR
DIM
PER
MENU
LI
VNA
FP
DT
NA
7
4
1 2
5
8
0
9
6
3
BACK
4/5" FPCDU 4/5" FPCDU
UL-801
AIRCRAFT
PRINTER:
ARINC 740.
ARINC 744, OR
SERIAL
1
1
* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS.
CVR/CVFDR
UNIVERSAL
SSDTU*
1
VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS.
SATCOM-BASED
AIRBORNE
TELEPHONY
SYSTEM
RS-232
CONFIGURATION MODULE
FANS
ARINC 741
A
R
I
N
C
7
5
7
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 17
23-20-06 15 December 2011
G. Configuration Module
The configuration module, an electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM) device, is mounted on the rear of the mounting tray and connected via a
dedicated interface to the UniLink. The configuration module stores information specific to
the installation.
The user can view and retrieve the aircraft configuration through specially designed pages
that can be accessed through the keypad on the CDU or MCDU. The UniLink retrieves the
configuration data during each power up cycle. Modifications to the configuration are
possible only on the ground and are restricted through software interlocks.
H. ARINC 429 Channels
UniLink provides sixteen ARINC 429 receivers and eight ARINC 429 transmitters.
(1) ARINC 429 Receivers
The sixteen ARINC 429 receivers can be independently configured for supported
ARINC devices. The receiver bus speed (high or low) is determined by the ARINC
device selected during configuration.
(2) ARINC 429 Transmitters
ARINC 429 transmitter, Port #1, is set to low speed by default. The remaining seven
ARINC 429 transmitters can be independently configured for bus speed (high or
low). Multiple ARINC devices of the same bus speed can be connected in parallel by
each transmitter configuration selection. Do not exceed 15 receive devices on one
ARINC transmitter port.
Device UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1) UniLink RX Speed
UASC FMS/CDU 1 LOW HIGH
UASC FMS/CDU 2 LOW HIGH
UASC FMS/CDU 3 LOW HIGH
739 MCDU 1 LOW LOW
739 MCDU 2 LOW LOW
739 MCDU 3 LOW LOW
702 FMS 1 LOW or HIGH NOTE 2
702 FMS 2 LOW or HIGH NOTE 2
702 FMS 3 LOW or HIGH NOTE 2
740/744/744A Printer LOW LOW
741 SDU LOW LOW
Voice Tune Bus NOTE 6 LOW Not Applicable
Vibro-Meter CMC LOW HIGH
604 CMC LOW LOW
750 VDR NOTE 6 HIGH HIGH
DHC8 IOP 1 Not Applicable LOW
DHC8 IOP 2 Not Applicable LOW
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 18
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Device UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1) UniLink RX Speed
Test Device (NOTE 3) LOW or HIGH HIGH
ARINC 743A GNSS Receiver Not Applicable HIGH or LOW (NOTE 4)
DADC1 Not Applicable HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5)
DADC2 Not Applicable HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5)
Generic 429 Device (1 – 4) LOW or HIGH NOTE 2
757 CVR HIGH HIGH Not Applicable
NOTE 1: Device TX speed supported by UniLink.
NOTE 2: The customer database specifies the data speed of this configurable device.
NOTE 3: The test device is not used in aircraft installations.
NOTE 4: References to an ARINC 743A GNSS receiver also include ARINC 743 Global Positioning
System (GPS) receivers. UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low)
of the GNSS or GPS and configures the interface accordingly.
NOTE 5: UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the Digital ADC and
configures the interface accordingly.
NOTE 6: Does not apply to UL-801.
I. RS-232/422 Serial Ports
UniLink provides six general purpose RS-232/422 transmitters and six general purpose
RS-232/422 receivers. These ports are available to perform as six full duplex channels. The
ports are capable of operating up to a 19.2 kilobaud rate. The serial port type selection
(RS-232 or RS-422) is determined by the type of serial device selected during configuration.
UniLink RS-422 serial ports support the interface between the UniLink and various
combinations of CDU/MCDU display processors (DPs), flat-panel multifunction displays
(MFDs), and EFI-890R displays to accomplish display of uplinked graphic images.
UniLink can be connected to up to three CDUs and one remote CDU/MCDU via ARINC
739 protocol over an ARINC 429 physical layer providing UniLink with control of the
CDU/MCDU text display. The user selects graphics to acquire and display from text menus
rendered by UniLink on the CDU/MCDU via this interface.
EFI-890R and high-resolution MFD (SCN 1011.4.8) displays are connected to UniLink via
an RS-422. UniLink supports two high-resolution connections.
If the device assigned to a serial port is a low-resolution display, UniLink sets up that port as
an RS-422 port at a baud rate specified by configuration item CDU/MFD Baud Rate, options
9801 BPS or 19.2 KBS.
Other devices supported by UniLink RS-232/422 serial ports include a serial printer and
SatCom telephony functions
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 19
23-20-06 15 December 2011
J. Discrete Inputs/Outputs
UniLink provides 10 general purpose discrete input connections and 14 general purpose
discrete output connections.
Discrete Inputs
Basic UniLink Discrete Input
Configurable Discrete Inputs
The discrete input signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is
active when the input is open or connected to a ground) are configurable.
The following discrete input types are selectable from the UniLink Discrete Input
Configuration menu:
Park Brake Set
Park Brake Set Options
Active State Active Inactive
Ground Park Brake Set Park Brake Released
Open Park Brake Set Park Brake Released
Strut Comp
Strut Comp Options
Active State Active Inactive
Ground Strut Compressed Strut Not Compressed
Open Strut Compressed Strut Not Compressed
5 VDC
3.3 VDC
DISCRETE
INPUT
NOTE: THE TRANSITION VOLTAGE VALUE IS 3.8 VDC.
THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 20
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Door n Closed
Door n Closed Options
Active State Active Inactive
Ground Door n is closed Door n is open
Open Door n is closed Door n is open
NOTE: If more than one door discrete input is wired and configured, the inputs are logically
AND’ed together by UniLink to determine approximately when "all doors are closed".
Discrete Outputs
UniLink provides 14 discrete outputs. Each discrete output is capable of current sinking up to
500mA, to drive relays, lights, and trigger a variety of aural warning generators.
Basic UniLink Discrete Output
Configurable Discrete Outputs
The discrete output signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is
active when the input is open or ground) are configurable.
FANS Visual (when FANS is enabled)
FANS Visual
Active State Active Inactive
Ground
(Recommended Configuration)
FANS ATC annunciator on FANS ATC annunciator off
Open FANS ATC annunciator off FANS ATC annunciator on
NOTE: 1. The ATC Annunciator power is connected to the aircraft 28 VDC.
2. This annunciator is used to alert the crew of an incoming FANS ATC message.
ENABLE
THERMAL
LIMIT
INN
V
CC
<<1
12 VDC
DISCRETE
OUTPUT
NOTE: THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 21
23-20-06 15 December 2011
FANS Aural (when FANS is enabled)
FANS Aural
Active State Active Inactive
Ground
(Recommended Configuration)
FANS alerter on FANS ATC annunciator off
Open FANS alerter off FANS ATC annunciator on
NOTE: The aural alerting devices must be connected to the aircraft 28 VDC power.
CPDLC Connect
CPDLC Connect
Active State Active Inactive
Ground CPDLC connection active No CPDLC connection
Open No CPDLC connection CPDLC connection active
NOTE: Use of this discrete is optional.
New Message
New Message n
Active State Active Inactive
Ground New/unread message/graphic
received
No new/unread messages
Open No new/unread messages New/unread message/graphic
received
NOTE: This discrete is intended to drive a visual annunciator. Not associated with FANS
advisories.
Chime
Chime n
Active State Active Inactive
Ground New/unread message/graphic
received
No new/unread messages
Open No new/unread messages New/unread message/graphic
received
NOTE: This discrete is intended to drive an aural annunciator.
Media NOCOMM
VHF NOCOMM/SAT NOCOMM/TEL NOCOMM
Active State Active Inactive
Ground Media link failed Media link established/idle
Open Media link established/idle Media link failed
NOTE: These discretes are intended to drive visual annunciators.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 22
23-20-06 15 December 2011
K. Ethernet
The UASC DTU-100/SSDTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet. The UniLink hardware
contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. All UniLink interfaces to the UASC DTU-100 can be
directly applied to the UASC SSDTU without any modifications to the UniLink.
L. Transmission Media Management
UniLink is capable of managing multiple links (VHF, TEL, and SAT) so that simultaneous
transmission and receipt of messages is possible on several different links. UniLink provides
individual management of the VDR radio and satellite communications equipment.
VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Capability
The internal VDR is capable of supporting both the D8PSK modulation of the VDL Mode 2
channel and the current ACARS MSK modulation of the POA ACARS channel (which is
used when the aircraft is outside of the VDL Mode 2 coverage area) or directed by the DSP.
POA, in conjunction with VDL Mode 2, supports the Future Air Navigation System (FANS)
applications that include ATS Facilities Notification (AFN), Controller-Pilot Datalink
Communications (CPDLC), and Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C).
The aircraft’s 24-bit International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) address is required for
VDL Mode 2 communications. This address is obtained from the selected DSP and is entered
during the configuration process and is stored in the configuration module.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 23
23-20-06 15 December 2011
M. VHF Management
The UniLink contains an internal VHF radio for its data communication. UniLink will only
attempt to transmit if the radio has successfully tuned to the selected frequency. VHF
Management requires that UniLink perform the following tasks in order to manage the VHF
air-ground link:
• Acquire a frequency - UniLink acquires a frequency by the Automatic selection method
or a frequency is provided by Autotune or manual crew selection/entry or recall from
previously established frequency from Non Volatile Memory at power up.
• Establish a frequency - UniLink establishes the acquired frequency by transmitting a
downlink block and receiving a necessary Positive Acknowledgment response.
• Maintain the frequency - UniLink maintains the established frequency until signal loss on
the frequency or until subsequent new frequency selection or entry.
The UniLink VHF Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is
explained by the table below.
VHF Media Status Reason
COMM/IDLE Communications have been established with the ground and datalink
messages can be transmitted over VHF. No data is currently being
transmitted.
COMM/SENDING A message is currently in the process of being transmitted over VHF and
UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/NO FREQ UniLink has not selected a frequency for tuning due to invalid FMS lat/long
or no radio type
NOCOMM/SCANNING UniLink is automatically selecting a frequency for tuning in current region
with enabled DSP.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING UniLink has sent communication to the ground and is awaiting a reply.
NOCOMM/NO DSP All DSPs have been manually selected OFF.
NOCOMM/VOICE The VDR is in VOICE mode.
NOTE: Does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR.
NOCOMM/VDR INOP VDR inoperative.
NOCOMM/VDR FAULT VDR is reporting a fault.
NOCOMM/VDR UNAVAIL UniLink has not set the VDR’s protocol state.
NOCOMM/MONITORING UniLink has not detected a viable VDL Mode 2 ground station.
NOCOMM/SUSPEND VHF communications have been suspended by the crew.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 24
23-20-06 15 December 2011
N. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL)
A dedicated standard telephone modem is designed into UniLink. This modem is used to
transfer data between a supported ground station and the aircraft subsystems. For example,
the airborne telephone modem is initially used for uploading messages, text weather, and
graphical weather data from a DSP via a dial-up connection. UniLink manages only one
RS-232 port for this use.
SatCom-based Airborne Telephony is supported by Iridium and Inmarsat systems that
include an integral air phone modem which UniLink accesses via an RS-232 interface. The
airborne telephony modem uploads messages, text weather, and graphical weather from a
DSP.
It is important to note that the UniLink does not support the MagnaStar Digital Airborne
Telephone System and the UASC Aero-I. There is no UniLink tip and ring interface as was
the case with previous UL-60X/70X products. However, the legacy use of the word TEL,
which is used to abbreviate telephony, remains unchanged and continues to indicate the use
of a configured RS-232 UniLink port in support of such systems.
If TEL is configured to be used in the priority rotation, the request is then routed to an
available SatCom system via a configured RS-232 port.
The available options for RS-232-capable air phone configurations are UASC T-T Aero-M
or Iridium. The Iridium selection supports a variety of RS-232 available Iridium SatCom
products.
The UniLink Telephony Communications Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page
and is explained in the following table.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 25
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Up to four low-resolution display devices can be connected to a single low-resolution bus
and one high-resolution device each can be connected to two high-resolution graphic ports.
TEL Media Status Reason
COMM/MDM TIMEOUT UniLink has dialed the phone but a timeout occurred prior to a connection
being established.
NOTE: Sequential, excessive timeouts will result in the NOCOMM/AUTO
DELAY message displaying.
COMM/DIALING UniLink has provided the phone with the dial string command and is waiting
for the phone to answer.
COMM/CONNECTING The ground has answered the phone and UniLink is communicating with the
DSP.
COMM/IDLE The phone is hung up and no attempt is currently being made to use it and
SatCom (TEL) is not suspended or waiting to retry.
COMM/CONNECTED The phone line is connected and messages can or are currently being
transferred.
COMM/PLEASE WAIT TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated. UniLink is in the process of
shutting down the connection.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED SatCom (TEL) has been suspended, either by the crew or automatically due
to excessive failed attempts.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting for the configurable AUTO-DELAY timer to expire before
trying again
NOCOMM/CONFIG FAIL While CONNECTING with the ground server, a message is received saying
the configuration sent by UniLink is invalid. The SatCom (TEL) system is
permanently shut down. Cycling UniLink power is required to exit this state.
NOCOMM/INIT FAIL The SatCom (TEL) system is not available for operation. One or both of the
following configuration items are invalid: Aircraft Registration Number, or
Phone Access Number.
NOCOMM/DIALING UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and is in the process of making
another connection attempt.
NOCOMM/PLEASE WAIT TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated while a connection is in
progress. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection.
NOCOMM/MDM TIMEOUT UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and while in the process of making
another connection attempt the UniLink modem has timed out.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 26
23-20-06 15 December 2011
O. SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT)
UniLink interfaces with an ARINC 741-capable SatCom system, such as the
Universal/Thrane & Thrane Aero-I SDU and others, via a low speed ARINC 429 interface.
Packet Mode ACARS data (Data 2) is sent to the SDU for forwarding to the ACARS
gateway on the ground through the Ground Earth Station (GES) and vice versa.
NOTE: The UASC Aero-I SatCom system is not approved for FANS messaging.
The UniLink SAT Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is
explained in the following table.
SatCom Media Status Reason
COMM/IDLE SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages
can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted.
COMM/SENDING A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is
waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL
NOTE: SDU is the Satellite
Data Unit.
The SatCom’s system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable.
NOCOMM/SDU INOP UniLink does not detect the SDU.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again.
NOCOMM/TIMEOUT Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration
setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink
received for the medium to return to COMM.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew.
COMM/IDLE SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages
can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted.
COMM/SENDING A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is
waiting for acknowledgement from the ground.
NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL
NOTE: SDU is the Satellite
Data Unit.
The SatCom’s system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable.
NOCOMM/SDU INOP UniLink does not detect the SDU.
NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again.
NOCOMM/TIMEOUT Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration
setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink
received for the medium to return to COMM.
NOCOMM/CONNECTING A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established.
NOCOMM/SUSPENDED SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 27
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Graphical Weather Depiction
UniLink provides configurable graphic ports which can be configured to interface with a
total of six graphics buses.
Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a SatCom
system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The tip and ring data interface,
available on previous UniLink models, is no longer required and therefore has been removed.
The graphics capability has been improved by the addition of two high resolution output
ports. Graphics may be displayed in high resolution (Hi-Res) for units that are capable of
displaying high resolution graphics, such as the EFI-890R in the Navigation Display (ND)
position or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed.
Example Graphic
These two high resolution RS-422 ports may be configured to support two dedicated
EFI-890R displays (all EFI-890Rs are capable of high resolution display while all
CDU/MCDUs display in low resolution). In the event that both a low resolution and a high
resolution graphic is requested, the UniLink automatically requests and uplinks two
formatted images reflecting the same data during the same call:
• One formatted to support the display of images on the low resolution output
• One formatted to support high resolution images that will result in a larger, higher quality
image
Graphics Display Configuration Options
The Graphics Display Configuration Options include low resolution graphics transmission to
CDUs, remote CDUs, MCDUs, MFDs; and high resolution graphics to high resolution
EFI-890R displays or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed.
P. ACARS Message Processing
UniLink provides services in the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System (ACARS). There are two types of ACARS data communications, ground-to-air via
uplink messages and air-to-ground via downlink messages, both of which are supported by
SatCom or VHF. Messages sent from one aircraft to another can only be accomplished
through the use of user-defined messages via the ground network. Direct communication
from aircraft to aircraft is not available. Uplink messages are generated by Airline Ground
Host Centers or an equivalent service provider, ATC facilities or a Datalink Service Provider
(DSP) such as ARINC or SITA. Uplink messages not generated by a DSP are passed to a
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 28
23-20-06 15 December 2011
DSP which then sends the uplink messages to a designated UniLink system or aircraft. The
message is then processed by UniLink or, when the message is meant for a peripheral unit, is
passed on to the appropriate peripheral unit.
(1) ACARS Uplink Message Receiving
When UniLink receives an uplink message from the ground system, it performs a
Block Check Sequence (BCS) error check. If the BCS message is valid, UniLink
accepts the message and generates a positive acknowledgment for transmission to the
ground. If the uplink message contains an error, UniLink generates a negative
technical acknowledgment. Upon receipt of the negative technical acknowledgment,
the ground system should retransmit the uplink message.
(2) ACARS Uplink Message Log
UniLink maintains an uplink message log capable of storing at least 40 AOC uplink
messages. UniLink stores only those uplink messages that are defined in the database
as requiring storage in the log. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific
messages from the message log. When the message log is full and a new message
requiring storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest read message in the log.
When the log is full of messages that have not been read and a new message requiring
storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest message.
(3) ACARS Downlink Message Origination
There are several actions that can generate a downlink. The crew may do so via the
CDU/MCDU and route the message to the UniLink for transmission, or UniLink may
automatically generate a downlink as a response to an event having occurred, such as
weight off wheels or an automatic position report.
(4) ACARS Downlink Message Queue
Once a downlink message is encoded, it is queued until the message can be
transmitted to the ground. UniLink is capable of maintaining at least 70 messages in
the transmission queue. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific messages
from the message log.
(5) ACARS Downlink Message Transmission
When a valid communication link exists, UniLink transmits the message having the
highest priority. If more than one message shares the highest priority then UniLink
selects the oldest from that group of messages. Upon receipt of the downlinked
message, the DSP performs a BCS error check and, if the BCS is valid, it routes it to
the proper destination. The ground system also generates a positive technical
acknowledgment for the message and transmits it to the aircraft. Upon receipt of a
positive technical acknowledgment, UniLink considers the message successfully
transmitted.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 29
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Q. Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages
UniLink generates advisory alerts annunciating normal and non-normal conditions that
require crew action. Selecting the advisory alert displays the UniLink page on which the
corresponding information is displayed or from which a required action may be performed.
Examples of advisories are: NEW MSG, VHF VOICE, NOCOMM, and NEW WX MAP.
UniLink provides real-time status information for other LRUs UniLink interfaces with via
the DEVICE STATUS page. When configured, devices such as FMSs, internal VHF radio,
741 SatCom-based system, printer, etc. show as OK or INOP. INOP is displayed when
communication between both devices has failed. If a particular device is not configured,
UniLink displays NO CONFIG as the device status.
Additionally, the state of various input sensors including all analog discretes is displayed via
the SENSOR STATUS page. These displays are useful for initial system installation and
trouble-shooting in the field
UniLink generates error messages to alert the crew of non-normal conditions. Generally, a
NEW ERROR MSG advisory appears, which when selected will display the error message
title and additional details if applicable. A log of error messages appears on the ERROR
LOG page.
Examples of error messages are:
• CONFIGURATION WARNING
• POWER –ON BIT FAILURE
• VHF CHANNEL CONGESTION
Additionally, UniLink generates pop-up windows for normal and non-normal alert
information that may require more timely crew awareness. Examples of pop-up window
messages are:
• QUEUE FULL
• PRINT JOB COMPLETE
R. Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)
Replacing voice communications between crews and air traffic control (ATC) with datalink
messages is intended to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity.
This is one of the main features in the UniLink.
The UL-801 provides a configurable ARINC transmit port to support the recording of
datalink messages on a compatible ARINC 757Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR/CVFDR).
The CVR/CVFDR records all messages that are sent to it by the UniLink. Messages are
provided to the CVR/CVFDR on an ARINC 429 data bus. This port may be configured for
high or low speed based on the recorder’s speed requirement.
When an ARINC transmit port is connected to a UASC CVR/CVFDR, the ARINC transmit
port must be configured as follows:
• PORT SPEED: HIGH
• PORT DEVICES: CVR
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 30
23-20-06 15 December 2011
UniLink supports transmission of datalink message recordings to any ARINC Characteristic
757 CVR/CVFDR.
The following information is sent to the CVR/CVFDR as part of the recording process:
• Uplinks to the aircraft
• Downlinks from the aircraft
• The time the message is displayed to the crew
• The crew's response to the message
• UniLink status data
• Any peripheral data that is addressed to the CVR
Records sent to the CVR may contain the following information:
• The message priority (if any)
• The display status of the message
• Time stamps of the message
• Other information required to identify the message.
The following examples describe ways that UniLink processes such data.
Example 1: Uplink to the Crew (Weather Graphic Received)
In the event that an uplink intended for display to the crew is received (Weather Graphic),
UniLink transmits a record to the CVR/CVFDR. When UniLink receives the graphic uplink,
UniLink displays the graphic.
Example 2: Downlink from the Crew (Crew-Commanded Downlink)
In the event that the crew generates or commands a downlink (a command to send a
downlink is initiated by the crew from CDU/MCDU), UniLink transmits a record to the
CVR/CVFD or UniLink queues a downlink. UniLink transmits another record once the
message successfully sends or if a message fails to send.
S. Printers
UniLink supports an interface to an ARINC 740/744/744A or a RS-232 serial printer.
UniLink only supports one printer in a configuration. If both ARINC and RS-232 serial
printers are configured, UniLink only uses the ARINC 740/744/744A printer.
UniLink supports printing of text data only. The maximum file size supported by UniLink is
16 KB, including any header and footer. If a print file is larger than 16 KB, UniLink discards
the print file and sends a message to the Status log.
NOTE: The file size limit was derived to provide a design guideline for reserving
memory for print jobs. The maximum file size from an ACARS uplink is about 3
KB and the maximum Williamsburg file size supported by UniLink is 6,320
bytes.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 31
23-20-06 15 December 2011
T. Transmission Media Interfaces - Configuration Option
SatCom is supported with a configurable interface to an A741 SDU for text-based messages.
Telephony is supported with a configurable RS-232 interface to a UASC T-T Aero-M or
Iridium systems for both text-based messages and graphical weather maps. MagnaStar and
UASC Aero-I tip/ring telephony interfaces are not supported.
VHF communications are supported with a configurable ARINC interface to an external
A750 VDR for text-based messages.
U. Text Message Processing
UniLink supports Aeronautical Operational Communications (AOC) flexible messaging and
FANS message handling. UniLink also supports both uplink and downlink messages from
peripheral systems.
UniLink supports Air Traffic Services ATS and AOC text messages, downlink graphical
weather requests, and uplink graphical weather images stored and displayed in one or more
message logs. Uplink and downlink message integrity checks are performed by means of a
32-bit CRC calculation.
Message alerting functions include configurable output discretes for visual and aural alerting
and digital outputs to various LRUs. Message alert inhibiting is configurable and is provided
during critical flight phases (takeoff and landing) and is based on flight parameters including
ground speed, altitude, and FMS approach mode.
V. Media Advisory Reporting Option
If enabled, UniLink sends the Media Advisory message to update the DSP regarding the
status and availability of datalink media, such as VHF, TEL, or SAT. It is useful for the DSP
to know the available datalink media when preparing a message for transmission to UniLink.
Upon request by the host processor, the DSP may forward this information to other DSPs.
Crew interaction is not required.
W. Automatic Position Reporting Option
The Automatic Position Reporting Option includes configurable on-ground and in-air
automatic position reporting selections. UniLink provides the ability to temporarily
disable/enable the automatic position reporting function and modify the reporting interval via
the UniLink POS REPORT page.
The Automatic Position Reporting messages may be customized by the user and may
conform to the format in ARINC Characteristic 702A. The user will be able to delay
transmission of Automatic Position Report messages for a configured amount of time after
the OFF event to reduce missed transmissions due to signal blockage during take off.
X. OOOI Reporting/History Option
The OOOI Reporting/History Option includes Out, Off, On, In (OOOI) downlink messaging
and history maintenance stored in UniLink’s non-volatile memory. Configurable input
parameters (door, brake, strut, ground speed) can be received from multiple sources based on
the specific installation. It’s recommended that OOOI be enabled if ARINC is selected as a
DSP.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 32
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Y. Flight Leg Transition
The Flight Leg Transition feature is provided to reduce the crew workload (such as
initializing the Origin of the next flight leg to the Destination of the flight leg that was just
completed). It is also used as a means of automatically logging data from a flight leg that was
just completed if that data may be needed for future reference, such as OOOI times and fuel.
Z. Meteorological Data Reporting Option
The Meteorological Data Reporting Option includes processing of uplink configuration
settings and automatic downlink messaging. Meteorological data items include atmospheric
temperature, pressure, and wind speeds collected at various durations throughout the flight.
Crew interaction is not needed.
AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat
UniLink provides a standard interface to ARINC 741-capable SatCom-based airborne
telephony systems. The UniLink meets DO-178B level C software requirements necessary
for all FANS messaging. The bearer systems such as Inmarsat and Iridium SatCom Systems
must meet DO-178B level D requirements. Check with the selected SatCom manufacturer
for further details regarding this important issue.
2. Operation
The UniLink is operated by controls provided by the FMS CDU/MCDU. Refer to the
UniLink Operator’s Manual, 23-20-06.01, for UniLink Operating Procedures.
If FANS is enabled, the report number for the UniLink FANS Operations Manual is 23-20-
06.02. This manual must be obtained separately.
The Operator’s Manual introduces the CDU/MCDU, explains the CDU/MCDU operating
philosophy, and provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys, Line Select Keys
(LSK), and their associated functions.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 101
23-20-06 15 December 2011
FAA Approval
1. General
Installation approval of the UniLink system is being accomplished under a variety of STCs
and Forms 337. For a new installation to be eligible for approval, it will be necessary to
apply to the FAA for an STC or to utilize an existing STC or Form 337.
This manual contains information directing the follow-on TC or STC applicant to include
specific maintenance instructions in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual or ICA when the Field
Loadable Software process is expected to be used as called out in FAA Order 8110.49
Section 5-4.
ACARS/graphics datalink functionality is NOT approved under TSO-C160.
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation received U.S. Federal Communication Commission
“Grant of Equipment Authorization” on TBD, in accordance with FCC Rule Part 87, with the
following transmitter specifications:
Mode Output Power
(Minimum) Frequency
Tolerance Channel
Spacing Frequency
Range Emission
Designator
A 16 Watts ±30 PPM 25 kHZ 118.000 to
136.975 MHz 13K0A2D
2 15 Watts ±5 PPM 25 kHZ 118.000 to
136.975 MHz 14K0G1D
A. Applicable TSOs
• TSO-C160
Refer to the TSO Deviations section.
B. TSO Deviations
• TSO-C160 Section 3.f Environmental Qualification
The FAA granted a deviation to use the environmental conditions specified in
RTCA/DO-160F in lieu of DO-160E.
• TSO-C160 Section 4.a.(1) and 4.a.(2) Marking
The FAA granted deviations to allow the parts to marked using the model designation
system as referenced in 14 CFR § 21.619(b) Amdt. 21-92 in accordance with 14 CFR §
21.616(d) Amdt.21-92 and § 45.15b, Amdt. 45-26.
− Section 4.a.(1) Marking: Authorization to mark the LRUs with the Model Designation
in order to capture both the hardware part number and software control number
(SCN).
− Section 4.a.(2) Marking: Authorization to not mark the LRUs with the date of
manufacture. Each part will be marked with a unique serial number.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 102
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. Equipment Classes
Equipment Classes
• UL-801, SCN 30:
− F
VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment
− 7
VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment, intended
to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles
Equipment Architecture Classes
• UL-801, SCN 30:
− W (CMU)
− Y (VDR)
D. Reference Documents
(1) TSO-C160 (11-Jan-2008): VDL Mode 2 Communications Equipment
(2) DO-281A (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Aircraft
VDL Mode 2 Physical, Link, and Network Layer (MPS for TSO-C160)
(3) AC 20-140A (07-Apr-2010): Guidelines for Design Approval of Aircraft Data
Communications Systems
(4) AC 20-160 (21-Feb-2008): Onboard Recording of Controller Pilot Data Link
Communication in Crash Survivable Memory
(5) DO-186B (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for
Airborne Radio Communications Equipment Operating Within the Radio Frequency
Range 117.975 – 137.000 MHz
(6) DO-258A (07-Apr-2005): Interoperability Requirements for ATS Applications Using
ARINC 622 Data Communications (FANS 1/A Interoperability Standard)
(7) RTCA/DO-160F (06-Dec-2007): Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for
Airborne Equipment
(8) RTCA/DO-178B (01-Dec-1992): Software Considerations in Airborne Systems and
Equipment Certification
(9) RTCA/DO-254 (19-Apr-2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic
Hardware
(10) RTCA/DO-306/ED-122 (11-Oct-2007): Safety and Performance Standards for Air
Traffic Data Link Services in Oceanic and Remote Airspace (Oceanic SPR Standard)
(11) ARINC 618-6 (Jun-2006): Air/Ground Character-Oriented Protocol Specification
(12) ARINC 623-3 (Apr-2005): Character-Oriented Air Traffic Service (ATS)
Applications
(13) ARINC 631-5 (Dec-2008): VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Implementation
Provisions
(14) ARINC 741P2-10 (09-Feb-2009): Aviation Satellite Communication System Part 2
System Design and Equipment Functional Description (Section 4.7 ACARS MU/CMU
- SATCOM Interface)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 103
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(15) ED-85A (Dec-2003): Data Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
"Departure Clearance" Data-Link Service
(16) ED-89A (Dec-2003): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
"ATIS" Data-Link Service
(17) ED-106A (Mar-2005): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the
“Oceanic Clearance” Data-Link Service
(18) GOLD (14-Jun-2010): Global Operational Data Link Document (GOLD)
(19) AC 120-70A (29-Dec-2005): Operational Authorization Process for use of Data Link
Communication System
(20) ICAO Doc 9613 (01-Jan-2008): Performance-based Navigation (PBN) Manual
(21) RTCA/DO-290/ED-120; Change 1 and Change 2 (29-Apr-2004): Safety and
Performance Requirements Standard for Air Traffic Data Link Services in
Continental Airspace (Continental SPR Standard)
(22) ED-154 (Jul-2008): Future Air Navigation System 1/A - Aeronautical
Telecommunication Network Interoperability Standard
E. Other References
TSO Functions
(1) VDL Mode 2 - Ref: TSO-C160, DO-281A, ARINC 631
Supports the requirements contained in TSO-C160 and MPS DO-281A. The UL-801
is equipment class F (VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation
environment) and 7 (VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation
environment, intended to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles) and architecture
class W (CMU) and Y (VDR). The UL-800 is architecture class W (VDR).
TSO Supporting Functions
(1) Data Loading of Software and Databases - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD
Application-level functionality may be field-modified by the transfer from portable
media (disk or flash memory) of the UniLink and VDR software programs as well as
databases that define the cockpit presentation, air/ground message types and formats,
as well as the geographic location of VHF ground stations.
(2) Config Module Interface - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD
An aircraft "personality module" is integrated with the UniLink to hold configuration
data unique to the aircraft installation. This includes the physical connections as well
as customer-specific operational preferences.
(3) BIT/Maintenance and Status Reporting - Ref: ARINC 758
Built-in-test and continuous health monitoring functions detect health of both internal
components (memory, I/O devices, S/W validity, etc.) as well as external systems.
Maintenance and Status reporting provides periodic output of the status of other
connected aircraft peripherals. Errors are presented to the cockpit and logged
internally for service and troubleshooting.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 104
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(4) VDL Mode A - Ref: ARINC 618, DO-186B
VDL Mode A refers to the analog communication protocols exercised by the VHF
data radio (VDR) and supported by the UniLink to exchange ACARS messages with
any appropriately equipped ground system. This mode is equivalent to the plain old
ACARS (POA) function of historical CMUs.
(5) SatCom Communication Interface - Ref: ARINC 618, ARINC 619
Satellite-based communication is available to the UniLink through a digital interface
to an external satellite data unit (SDU). The SatCom interface provides an alternative
media to VHF for the transmission of ACARS messages supporting
FANS 1/A+, ACARS ATS, and AOC applications. Customer preferences usually
prioritize the use of SatCom communications lower than VHF communications
resulting in this function generally being used in Remote or Oceanic regions.
(6) ACARS - Ref: ARINC 618
The Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) is a data
link protocol and message structure which allows communication of character-
oriented data between aircraft systems and ground communication service provider
systems.
(7) AOA - ACARS over AVLC Ref: ARINC 618
The AOA function transports ACARS messages using ACARS routing over VDL
Mode 2 Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC) - the data link layer. AOA provides a
more efficient, digital exchange of air/ground ACARS messages than VDL Mode A.
(8) ACARS Air Traffic Services (for example, D-ATIS, PDC, OC) (TSO indirect) -
Ref: ARINC 622, ARINC 623
The ACARS ATS function is the exchange of text-based Air Traffic Services
information between the flight crew and ATS ground host processing systems. These
services include: Automatic Terminal Information Services (ATIS), Oceanic
Clearances (OC), Pre-Departure Clearances (PDC), Terminal Weather Information
for Pilots (TWIP), Pushback Clearances, and Expected Taxi Clearances.
(9) Airline Operations Control (AOC – for example, text weather, weight, and balance) -
Ref: ARINC 620
The AOC function is the exchange of text-based information between the flight
crew/aircraft systems and the operator’s AOC processing systems (for example,
dispatch, maintenance, or meteorological services) throughout all phases of flight
(pre-flight, enroute, and post flight). Data included in the messages can be drawn
from other aircraft systems (such as I/O concentrator buses or FMS units) or can be
entered by the flight crew via a control and display unit.
(10) Datalink Message Recording - Ref: ARINC 758, ARINC 619
Intending to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity, the
trend of replacing voice communications between flight crews and air traffic control
(ATC) with datalink messages is becoming more prevalent. In order to aid in
potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports transmission of datalink
messaging records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 cockpit voice recorder (CVR).
Records presented to the CVR include messages exchanged between the UniLink and
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 105
23-20-06 15 December 2011
CSPs and between the UniLink and peripheral devices, datalink-based crew actions,
and other datalink events.
Non-TSO Functions
(1) Telephony Communication Interface - Ref: SRD
The telephony communication interface provides an alternate media for the limited
transfer of operator’s AOC messages and weather graphics between the aircraft and
the ground. The telephony interface uses industry standard protocols for access to an
airborne telephone modem that is part of an on-board satellite communication system.
Telephony messaging is supported through separate air-air/air-ground channels from
other SATCOM ACARS ATS and FANS 1/A+ message functions.
(2) FANS 1/A+ Ops Credit for FANS - Ref: DO-258A, GOLD, ARINC 622
UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by offering a FANS-1/A +
implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance efficiency,
and increase capacity by replacing routine voice transmissions between flight crews
and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have
no or limited radar coverage. FANS operational credit can be applied for following
UniLink installation airworthiness approval for aircraft that are properly equipped.
(3) Weather Graphics - Ref: SRD
Graphical weather images can be requested by the crew and transferred by UniLink
from the ground via the Telephony Communication Interface and presented on
compatible display units (UASC only) in the cockpit. This facility is supported by
ground AOC facilities complying with UASC-proprietary protocols and message
formats. The images presented are intended for non-essential use.
2. Software Criticality
SCN 10.X Main UniLink Bootloader Software
Main UniLink Bootloader software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178B Level D
(Minor). Level D software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous behavior,
as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of
system function resulting in a minor failure condition for the aircraft”.
VDR Bootloader SCN 10.X
The VDR boot software is partitioned from the VDR application and will be developed to
Level D. The VDR boot software is stored in a flash memory device separate from that of the
application software. Once the application software is invoked, the boot software is
deactivated.
VDR Transmit Monitor SCN 10.X
The VDR transmit monitor software is partitioned from the VDR boot and application
software and will be developed to Level C. The VDR transmit monitor software is stored and
executes on a separate microcontroller residing on a different physical circuit card from that
that hosts the VDR boot and application functions.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 106
23-20-06 15 December 2011
SCN 30.X Application Software
Application software version SCN 30.X is categorized as DO-178B Level C (Major). Level
C software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the
system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function
resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft”.
SCN 10.X VHF Data Radio Application Software
VHF Data Radio Application software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178C Level
C (Major). Level C software is defined by DO-178B as “software whose anomalous
behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a
failure of system function resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft”.
3. Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529,
25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529
Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:
Maintenance Requirements and Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness
SYSTEM: Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink System
Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operator’s Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance
Program.
(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UniLink (system description, removal,
installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems Corporation’s
(UASC) Installation Manual 23-20-06.
(2) Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers
contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operator’s
appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC). Refer to Equipment
Specifications, F. Electronic Part Marking, of this manual for additional parts
marking information.
(3) Wiring diagram information contained in the aircraft installation’s data package
should be placed into the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram
Manuals.
(4) Installation specific electrical drawings, mechanical drawings and miscellaneous
documents are listed on the data package Master Drawing List.
(5) The LRU’s location and access requirements are as defined by the installer.
(6) Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulletins and/or
Installation Manual revision.
(7) The system performs full self-test BITE at each power on and any failures are
annunciated to the crew.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 107
23-20-06 15 December 2011
A. Airworthiness Limitations
Scheduled Maintenance Program
Scheduled Maintenance Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate
aircraft maintenance program are as follows:
(1) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks: None Required
(2) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to
determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures: None Required
(3) Recommended Periodic Inspections: None Required
(4) Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections: None Required
(5) Recommended Replacement Interval: None Required
Unscheduled Maintenance Program
Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the
UniLink, upgrade of the Field Loadable software, or other modifications. If the UniLink is
removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be checked and
amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in applicable manuals.
B. Compliance
Universal Avionics has published two compliance reports for the UL-80X systems. These
reports describe installation requirements that must be considered as part of the installation
airworthiness approval. Contact Universal Avionics Product Support to receive the latest
revisions of these reports.
RPRT-2012-1005, AC 20-140A Compliance Report for the UL-80X UniLink LRU with
Software SCN 30.X
RPRT-2012-1007, UniLink UL-80X With Software SCN 30.X Compliance Summary Report
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 108
23-20-06 15 December 2011
4. Environmental Qualification Forms
The environmental categories under which the UniLink is approved (Reference RTCA DO–
160F) are listed on the following Environmental Qualification Forms.
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE UniLink UL-801
PART NO. 10801-XX
TSO NUMBER TSO-C160
MANUFACTURER Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
Conditions DO-160F
Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests
Temperature and Altitude 4 A2 E1
Inside or outside pressure vessel
−55°C to +70°C
Maximum altitude—70,000 feet
For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared
by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are
used.
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X There is no fan on this product.
Temperature Variation 5 B
Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of
airplane.
5 degrees/minute
Humidity 6 A Standard humidity
Operational Shocks and
Crash Safety 7 B, E
Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for
operational shock and safety.
Vibration 8 S Test category S—Standard
Explosion Atmosphere 9 H
Equipment H—including hermetically sealed, contains
hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing.
Environment 2—atmosphere where flammable mixture
exist only because of spillage or leakage.
Waterproofness 10 W
Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal
airplane operations.
Fluids Susceptibility 11 X Not tested—Fluid contamination not commonly
encountered.
Sand and Dust 12 X Not tested—Not subject to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13 X Not tested—Equipment not exposed to severe fungus
contamination.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 109
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Conditions DO-160F
Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests
Salt Fog 14 X Not tested—Equipment not subjected to salt
atmosphere.
Magnetic Effect 15 Z
Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to
cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is
measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be
considered compliant with Category Z.)
Power Input 16 Z
DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not
designated to transmit under emergency electrical
system conditions.
Voltage Spike 17 A Equipment installed where high degree of protection
against voltage spikes is required.
Audio Frequency
Conducted Susceptibility 18 Z —
Induced Signal
Susceptibility 19 ZC
Equipment intended for operation where interference
free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary
power is constant frequency or DC.
Radio Frequency
Susceptibility (Radiated
and Conducted)
20 R HIRF conditions are part of normal environment.
Emission of Radio
Frequency Energy 21 M —
Lightning Induced
Transient Susceptibility 22 A3 G33
J33
Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test
performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test
performed to level G33.
NOTE: The pin test was performed to level A3 except
for the Ethernet signal pins which were tested to
Level A2.
Lightning Direct Effects 23 X —
Icing 24 X —
Electrostatic Discharge 25 A —
Flammability 26 X —
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 110
23-20-06 15 December 2011
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
NOMENCLATURE Configuration Module
PART NO. 108009
TSO NUMBER TSO-C160
MANUFACTURER Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
3260 East Universal Way
Tucson, AZ 85756-5097
Conditions DO-160F
Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests
Temperature and Altitude 4 A2 E1
Inside or outside pressure vessel
−55°C to +70°C
Maximum altitude—70,000 feet
For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared
by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are
used.
In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 X There is no fan on this product.
Temperature Variation 5 B
Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of
airplane.
5 degrees/minute
Humidity 6 A Standard humidity
Operational Shocks and
Crash Safety 7 B, E
Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for
operational shock and safety.
Vibration 8 S Test category S—Standard
Explosion Atmosphere 9 H
Equipment H—including hermetically sealed, contains
hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing.
Environment 2—atmosphere where flammable mixture
exist only because of spillage or leakage.
Waterproofness 10 W
Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal
airplane operations.
Fluids Susceptibility 11 X Not tested—Fluid contamination not commonly
encountered.
Sand and Dust 12 X Not tested—Not subject to blowing sand and dust.
Fungus Resistance 13 X Not tested—Equipment not exposed to severe fungus
contamination.
Salt Fog 14 X Not tested—Equipment not subjected to salt
atmosphere.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 111
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Conditions DO-160F
Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests
Magnetic Effect 15 Z
Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to
cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is
measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be
considered compliant with Category Z.)
Power Input 16 Z
DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not
designated to transmit under emergency electrical
system conditions.
Voltage Spike 17 A Equipment installed where high degree of protection
against voltage spikes is required.
Audio Frequency
Conducted Susceptibility 18 Z —
Induced Signal
Susceptibility 19 ZC
Equipment intended for operation where interference
free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary
power is constant frequency or DC.
Radio Frequency
Susceptibility (Radiated
and Conducted)
20 R HIRF conditions are part of normal environment.
Emission of Radio
Frequency Energy 21 M —
Lightning Induced
Transient Susceptibility 22 A3 G33
J33
Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test
performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test
performed to level G33.
Lightning Direct Effects 23 X —
Icing 24 X —
Electrostatic Discharge 25 A —
Flammability 26 X —
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 112
23-20-06 15 December 2011
5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide.
NOTE: Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not
appear in the final supplement.
<Name of Applicant> AFM Supplement for <Aircraft Model>
<Address>
Supplement No.
{SAMPLE}
FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
FOR
AIRCRAFT MAKE: __________________________________
AIRCRAFT MODEL: ________________________________
AIRCRAFT REG: ___________________________________
AIRCRAFT S/N: ___________________________________
This supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the
airplane is modified by the installation of a Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (UASC)
UniLink System, in accordance with STC ____________________________, (or Form 337).
The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those
areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in
this supplement, consult the appropriate basic Airplane Flight Manual.
FAA Approved:
<Name>
<Title>
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>
<Address>
FAA Approved Date:
Page 1 of y
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 113
23-20-06 15 December 2011
REVISION HISTORY
Sheet Rev Description Approved
1-….. N/C Original Document
Date:_________________
______________________
(Name)
(Title)
FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION
(Name of Aircraft Certification Office)
(Address)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 114
23-20-06 15 December 2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1 General 4
2 Limitations 5
3 Emergency and Abnormal Procedures 8
4 Normal Procedures 9
5 Performance Data 12
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 115
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Section 1 - General
A. Installation Description
<The following is a sample of how the introduction could read. Fully describe all interfaces
with the UniLink.>
The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink installation is interfaced with up to
three UASC Flight Management Systems.
The UniLink contains software 30.X.
Section 2 - Limitations
A. Operator’s Manual
The UniLink Operator’s Manual, report number 23-20-06.01, must be available to the flight
crew when UniLink is to be used during flight. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is
23-20-06.02.>.
B. Limitations
When a UniLink CDU/MCDU message display screen is labeled “Unverified” or “AOC”,
the Aircraft Communications and Reporting System (ACARS) is unable to ensure that
message content was not corrupted during transmission. Unverified messages must be
restricted to those that do not create an unsafe condition if:
(1) The message is not received.
(2) The message is delivered to the wrong recipient.
(3) The message content may be frequently corrupted.
NOTE: Unverified message contents should be treated as advisory only.
Section 3 - Emergency and Abnormal Procedures
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Page x of y
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 116
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Section 4 - Normal Procedures
Normal operating procedures are outlined in the UniLink Operator’s Manual, report number
23-20-06.01. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is 23-20-06.02.>.
Section 5 – Performance Data
No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 201
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Equipment Specifications
1. UniLink Equipment Specifications
A. UniLink Part Number Matrix
Hardware Variant
00 = Baseline
Basic Part
Number
XX
10801 -
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 202
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. UniLink Installation Kit
(1) Installation Kit P/N K12030-1
Quantity Part Number Description
1
13636-93601-2
or
93601-2
Rack, ARINC 600, 1 MCU (Barry Controls)
6 MS24693C4 Screw, Recessed, Cres, 100° CSK, 4-40 x 3/8”
1 1219 Rack Connector
2 MS51957-20 Screw, 4-40 x 7/8”, Cres (for configuration module)
2 MS21083C04 Nut, 4-40, Cres, Self Lock (for configuration module)
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for the listed items in the installation kits.
C. Power Specifications
The UniLink will continue to operate with a 19.0V power input.
Component Current/Power
(Amps @ VDC)/Watts Inrush Current
(Amps @ VDC)
Model Part No.
22.0V
Min 27.5V
Nominal 32.0V
Max 22.0V
Min 27.5V
Nominal 32.0V
Max
STBY TX STBY TX STBY TX
UL-801 10801-XX 1A;
22.0W
3.5A typical
@ 77W 0.9A;
24.8W
3.5A typical
@ 96W 0.7A;
22.4W
3.5A
typical @
112W 2.5A @
<100ms
2.5A @
<100ms
2.5A @
<100ms
7A
maximum
@ 154W
7A
maximum
@ 192W
7A
maximum
@ 224W
NOTE: • The UL-801 is designed to operate using a 5A circuit breaker.
• The UL-801 VDR Transmit Message Duty Cycle is < 750ms.
D. Equipment Weights
Component Weight
UL-801 UniLink Approximately 4.5 Lbs.
Equipment Rack 11.5 Oz.
Connector 5.6 Oz.
Configuration Module 0.5 Oz.
E. VHF Antenna Specifications
Antenna Specifications
Coax Cable Attenuation < 3 dB
Impedance 50 Ohms
Frequency Range 118.000 – 136.975
Power Rating 15W - 35W
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 203
23-20-06 15 December 2011
F. Electronic Part Marking
UniLink supports Electronic Part Marking and is in compliance with FAA Order Number
8110.49 which allows verification of the installed part number and software versions by
accessing pages on the connected display device such as a CDU or MCDU. The UniLink
nameplate, as shown below, makes reference to the Installation Manual (IM) where such
information can be found.
Per FAA Order number 8110.49, there should be a process in place to ensure that
maintenance personnel record loaded Field Loadable Software (FLS) part number in the
necessary maintenance logs.
When new software is loaded into the unit, it is the maintenance personnel’s responsibility to
ensure that the software part number has been logged and verified before the unit/aircraft is
returned to service.
Changes to software part number, version, and/or operational characteristics should be
reflected in the Operator’s Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement, and/or any other appropriate document.
AIRBORNE DATALINK
UL-800
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION
DO - 178B LEVEL C
TSO-C160 (Dev)
EQUIPMENT CLASS
SEE IM 23-20-05
R
SCN ELECTRONIC MARKING
SEE IM 23-20-05
P/N 10800-00
MANUFACTURED BY
TUCSON AZ 85756 U.S.A.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 204
23-20-06 15 December 2011
G. Equipment Drawings
(1) UL-801 (P/N 10801-XX) Outline Drawing
15.2±.1
CG
CGCG
(4.2)
(8.3)
7.6±.1
(.5)
1.1±.1
1. WEIGHT 10801: 4.54 LBS ± 5%
2 POSITION ARINC 600 CONNECTOR POLARIZATION KEYS
TO CODE #08 .
2
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 205
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Rack Drawing (P/N 13636-93601-2)
2.50
14.92
9.000 1.77
±0.02
0.390 ±0.005 DIA,
x 100° CSK
2 PLACES
7.00
CONNECTOR (REF)
1.965
0.545
6.020
12.720
RETAINER, FRONT
(MS14108-4)
0.230 ±0.005 DIA,
x 100° CSK
6 PLACES
1.23
12.220
APPROX REAR
OF UNIT
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 206
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(3) Configuration Module (P/N 108009)
(4) Configuration Module Installation Detail
NOTE: The darkened portion of the rack connector above indicates the extended part of the key;
the light portion indicates the key hole.
.282"
1.200"
.875"
108009 CONFIGURATION MODULE
4-40 SCREWS AND
NUTS
CONNECTOR
UL801 RACK CONNECTOR KEYING
ARINC 600 #08 POLARIZATION
(BLACK SEGMENT INDICATES RACK POST)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 207
23-20-06 15 December 2011
H. Signal Specifications
(1) Digital Inputs
(a) FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data
Label Description Format UNS
HS429-1
TX Rate
(ms)
ARINC
429 HS
TX Rate
(ms)
Notes
102 Selected Altitude BNR 200 N/A Crew selected via CP.
116 Cross-track Distance BNR 100 100
Cross-track distance is
relative to SXTK
147 Magnetic Variation BNR 1000 500
TX rate ARINC 429 HS
bus = 100 ms.
150 UTC BNR 1000 1000 N/A
203 Pressure Altitude BNR 100 1000 N/A
204 Baro-Corrected Altitude BNR 100 500
ADC dependent.
Baro-corrected altitude is
output if available.
205 Mach BNR 500 N/A N/A
206 Indicated Air Speed BNR 500
(NOTE 2) N/A N/A
210 True Air Speed BNR 100 500 N/A
212 Altitude Rate BNR 100 N/A N/A
213 Static Air Temperature BNR 500 1000 N/A
231 Actual Navigation
Performance BCD 500 500 N/A
233 Selected Cross-track BCD 500 N/A
Crew selected offset from the
flight plan.
251 Along Track Distance to
WPT BNR 1000 500 N/A
252 Estimated Time to Waypoint BNR 500 500 N/A
260 Date BCD 1000 500 N/A
270 Status DSC 100 500 N/A
272 Active Leg Attributes DSC 100 N/A Contains flight phase data.
310 Present Latitude BNR 100 100 N/A
311 Present Longitude BNR 100 100 N/A
312 Ground Speed BNR 100 500 N/A
313 True Track Angle BNR 1000 500 N/A
314 True Heading BNR 100 100 N/A
315 Wind Speed BNR 1000 500 N/A
316 True Wind Angle BNR 1000 500 N/A
320 Magnetic Heading BNR 100
(NOTE 1)
100
(NOTE 2) N/A
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 208
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Label Description Format UNS
HS429-1
TX Rate
(ms)
ARINC
429 HS
TX Rate
(ms)
Notes
325 Roll Angle BNR 100
(NOTE 1)
100
(NOTE 2) N/A
370 WGS-84/GNSS Height BNR 1000 N/A
371 Equipment ID DSC 1000 1000 N/A
NOTE: 1. When in DEMO mode, the label is not transmitted.
2. Label is output during DEMO mode when IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set active.
When IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set inactive, these labels are inhibited during DEMO mode.
(b) 702A FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
203 Pressure Altitude BNR 1000
210 True Air Speed BNR 500
213 Static Air Temperature BNR 1000
314 True Heading BNR 100
315 Wind Speed BNR 500
316 True Wind Angle BNR 500
(c) ARINC 741 SDU Broadcast Data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
270 Status DSC 1000
(d) ARINC 740/744A Printer Broadcast Data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
350 Printer Status DSC 1000
(e) DHC8-S400 IOP Bus #1 and IOP Bus #2 Broadcast Data ARINC 429
Label Description Format Source
107 Selected Flap Position BNR FCU
164 Radio Altimeter 1 BNR RA 1
164 Radio Altimeter 2 BNR RA 2
176 Left Engine Fuel Temperature BNR FMU 1 (IOP 1)
176 Right Engine Fuel Temperature BNR FMU 2 (IOP 2)
204 Baro Alt 1 (cor) BNR ADU 1
204 Baro Alt 2 (cor) BNR ADU 2
205 Mach Number 1 BNR ADU 1
205 Mach Number 2 BNR ADU 2
206 Calib Airspeed 1 BNR ADU 1
206 Calib Airspeed 2 BNR ADU 2
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 209
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Label Description Format Source
210 True Airspeed 1 (TAS) BNR ADU 1
210 True Airspeed 2 (TAS) BNR ADU 2
211 Total Air Temp 1 BNR ADU 1
211 Total Air Temp 2 BNR ADU 2
212 Altitude Rate 1 BNR ADU 1
212 Altitude Rate 2 BNR ADU 2
213 Static Air Temp 1 (SAT) BNR ADU 1
213 Static Air Temp 2 (SAT) BNR ADU 2
244 Left Fuel Flow BNR Left Fuel Flow Meter
244 Right Fuel Flow BNR Right Fuel Flow Meter
245 Left Gas Gen Speed (NL) BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
245 Right Gas Gen Speed (NL) BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
246 Left Gas Gen Speed (NH) BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
246 Right Gas Gen Speed (NH) BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
247 Total Fuel Qty Lbs BNR FQC
256 Left Tank Fuel Qty Lbs BNR FQC
256 Right Tank Fuel Qty Lbs BNR FQC
270 IOP 1 Discrete Word 1 BNR IOP 1
270 IOP 2 Discrete Word 2 BNR IOP 2
316 Left Engine Oil Temp BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
316 Right Engine Oil Temp BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
317 Left Eng Oil Pressure BNR Left Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 1)
317 Right Eng Oil Pressure BNR Right Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 2)
325 Roll Altitude 1 BNR AHRS 1
325 Roll Altitude 2 BNR AHRS 2
336 Left Engine Torque BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
336 Right Engine Torque BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
345 Left ITT BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
345 Right ITT BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
346 Left Propeller BNR FADEC 1 (A/B)
346 Right Propeller BNR FADEC 2 (A/B)
(f) ARINC 739A MCDU Broadcast Data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
172 System Identification Word DSC 1000
270 MCDU Status Word #1 DSC 1000
377 MCDU Identifier Word DSC 1000
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 210
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(g) ARINC 743 GNSS Broadcast Data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
076 GNSS Altitude BNR 1000
103 GNSS Track Angle BNR 1000
110 GNSS Latitude BNR 1000
111 GNSS Longitude BNR 1000
112 GNSS Ground Speed BNR 1000
150 UTC Time BNR 1000
165 Vertical Velocity BNR 1000
260 Date BCD 1000
273 GNSS Sensor Status DSC 1000
(h) 604 CMC ARINC 429 Broadcast data
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
270 Status DSC 1000
(2) Digital Outputs
(a) Standard UniLink Broadcast Data ARINC 429
Label Description Format Transmission Rate (ms)
172 System Identification Word DSC 1000
214 ICAO Aircraft Address Word #1 DSC 1000
216 ICAO Aircraft Address Word #2 DSC 1000
270 Status Word #1 DSC 1000
276 Status Word #2 DSC 1000
350 Maintenance Word #1 DSC 1000
351 Maintenance Word #2 DSC 1000
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 211
23-20-06 15 December 2011
I. HS-429-1 Bus – UniLink
NOTE: Although there are HS-429-1 labels available for GLS, TAWS, and
Vision-1, only the labels for UniLink are shown in the following table.
Label Definition Format TX Rate Update
Rate
150 Greenwich Mean Time BNR 1000 ms
204 Barometric Altitude (429 GAMA) BNR 100 ms
213 Static Air Temperature BNR 100 ms
500 ms
100 ms
500 ms
234 Poll Word (ENQ) from MDF As required
234 Clear to Send Word (CTS) from MDF
234 Synchronization Word (SYN) from MDF
234 Button-Push Word (BPW) from MDF
234 ACK Word from User System from MDF
234 NAK Word from User System from MDF
235 Full Data Word 1000 ms and as required
235 Partial Data Word
235 Protocol Word
235 Solo Word
235 Start of Transmission
235 End of Transmission
252 Time to Go (429 GAMA) BNR 500 ms 1 per sec.
260 Date BCD 1000 ms
261 GPS Discrete Word 1 (429 GAMA) DSC 1000 ms
310 Present Position Latitude BNR 100 ms
311 Present Position Longitude BNR 100 ms
312 Ground Speed BNR 100 ms 100 ms
315 Wind Speed BNR 1000 ms
316 True Wind Speed BNR 1000 ms
340 Present Position Fine Latitude BNR 100 ms 100 ms
341 Present Position Fine Longitude BNR 100 ms 100 ms
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 212
23-20-06 15 December 2011
J. Configurable LRUs
Item Configurable LRU Qty Supported by UL-80X (I/O Type)
Input Data Equipment
1 A743 GPS/A743A GNSS 1 (A429)
2 DHC8 IOP 2 (A429)
3 Digital ADC 2 (A429)
4 UASC FMS/CDU 3 (A429)
5 A702 FMS 3 (A429)
6 604 CMC 1 (A429)
7 VM CMC 1 (A429)
8 Generic Device 1 (A429)
Display Equipment
9 UASC A739A MCDU 3 (A429)
10 Standard A739A MCDU 3 (A429)
11 EFI-890R 2 (RS-422)
12 MFD-640 1 (RS-422)
13 CDU 3 (RS-422)
14 Remote CDU/MCDU (UASC) 2 (RS-422)
Transmission Media
15 Internal VHF Radio (VDR) (UL-801 only) 1 (A429)
16 A750 VDR (UL-800 only) 1 (NA)
17 A741 SDU 1 (A429)
18 Telephony 1 (RS-232)
NOTE 1: The ADC interface is used as a supplement to FANS required air data that was not
supplied by the FMS such as Mach Number and IAS. The ADC interface can still be used
to supplement this FMS data in the case the data from the FMS may be invalid or NCD.
NOTE 2: A maximum of six total display devices can be configured at a time, one high-resolution
device on each of two high-res ports and up to four low-resolution devices on the low-res
port. An RCDU has a separate display processor from the master CDU/MCDU that it is
connected to.
NOTE 3: The diagnostic RS-232 port is a dedicated connection and is not a configurable item of the
general purpose RS-232/422 serial channels.
NOTE 4: The AirCell ground-based cellular network has been decommissioned by AirCell.
"Iridium/AirCell" equipment will continue to be supported; the "AirCell" only equipment
support has been removed.
NOTE 5: UL-80X does not support tip/ring telephony devices (Magnastar, UASC T –T Aero-I, AirCell
only). Serial telephony devices are supported (Iridium, UASC T –T Aero-M).
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 301
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Installation and Wiring
1. Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting
A. UniLink Mounting
The UniLink may be installed inside or outside of the pressure vessel. The UniLink must not
be mounted next to excessive heat producing equipment or in such a way as to impede
normal convection cooling and it must not be mounted with its rear connector up. The
UniLink may be mounted in any rotational direction in an upright position. The UniLink rack
must be grounded to the airframe by use of proper bonding methods. This provides a positive
grounding of the rack to which data shields may be connected.
2. Wiring Diagrams
The following wiring diagrams show connections between the UL-801 and other avionics
equipment used in typical installations. Refer to the appropriate FMS technical manual for
additional required wiring.
These diagrams include our suggested choices for configurable discretes and
communications ports but the choice is left up to the discretion of the installer. Mark the
configuration worksheets to show your actual installation. Configuration worksheets are
found in the System Data Installation section of this manual.
NOTE: The FMS must have SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later in order to utilize FANS.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 302
23-20-06 15 December 2011
A. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1C
(P/N 1017-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
P1
P2
P1
P2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
#1 UNS-1C
(P/N 1017-XX-2XX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Z
t
r
X
Z
t
r
X
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 303
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801XX)
----CONTINUED----
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
2
16
5A
220
20
6
5
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1C, P/N 1017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1C, P/N 1017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 304
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1C+
(P/N 10172-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
t
Z
t
r
Z
X
P1
P2
P1
P2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
#1 UNS-1C+
(P/N 10172-XX-2XX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
r
X
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 305
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
2
16
5A
220
20
5
6
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
5
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 306
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1E
(P/N 2017-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
Z
X
Z
X
P1
P2
P1
P2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
#1 UNS-1E
(P/N 2017-XX-2XX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
r
t
r
t
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 307
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
2
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
16
5A
220
20
5
6
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1E, P/N 2017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1E, P/N 2017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 308
23-20-06 15 December 2011
D. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Csp
(P/N 1019-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
50
49
48
47
P2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
#2 UNS-1Csp
(P/N 1019-XX-2XX)
50
48
P2
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
49
47
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 309
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
16
5A
CONFIG
MODULE
2
2
20
5
6
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED---- VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 310
23-20-06 15 December 2011
E. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Esp
(P/N 2019-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
50
49
48
47
P2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
#2 UNS-1Esp
(P/N 2019-XX-2XX)
50
49
48
47
P2
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 311
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
2
16
5A
220
20
5
6
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 312
23-20-06 15 December 2011
F. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1D
(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX)
BP
+28 VDC POWER 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC 429
RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC 429
TX
#2 UNS-1D
(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX)
A
B
ARINC 429
RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC 429
TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
1
1
1
1
3
7
6
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 313
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
5
5
4
4
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
6
7
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
5THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
8BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
8
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 314
23-20-06 15 December 2011
G. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1D+
(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX)
BP
+28 VDC POWER 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC 429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC 429 TX
#2 UNS-1D+
(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX)
A
B
ARINC 429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC 429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
1
1
1
1
6
2
3
3
7
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 315
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
5
5
4
4
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
6
7
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
5THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
8BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
8
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 316
23-20-06 15 December 2011
H. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1F
(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX)
BP
+28 VDC POWER 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION MODULE
(P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
#2 UNS-F
(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX)
A
B
ARINC 429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC 429 TX
MP
----CONTINUED----
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
1
1
1
1
3
2
7
6
ARINC 429 RX
HS ARINC 429 TX
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 317
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
5
5
4
4
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
6
7
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
5THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS.
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
8
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
8
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 318
23-20-06 15 December 2011
I. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 Tx #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1K
(P/N 1116-XX-111X)
BP
+28 VDC INPUT 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
3
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 10651)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC
429 Rx
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 Rx #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 Tx
#2 UNS-1K
(P/N 1116-XX-111X)
A
B
ARINC
429 Rx
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 Rx #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 Tx
MP
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 Tx #2
(FMS 2)
DISCRETE INPUT #3
4
4
1
1
1
1
YELLLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
2
3
6
5
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 319
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
4
4
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
5
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 320
23-20-06 15 December 2011
J. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1K+
(P/N 11162-XX-111X)
BP
2+28 VDC
4
+28 VDC POWER
POWER GND
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
TP
11C 24
11D 24
12C 24
12D 24
DATA CLK
+5 VDC
DATA I/O
GND
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1K+
(P/N 11162-XX-111X)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
DISCRETE INPUT #3
4
4
1
1
1
1
YELLLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
2
3
6
5
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1K+ SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS).
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
----CONTINUED----
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 321
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
4
4
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE
UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
5
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X)
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 322
23-20-06 15 December 2011
K. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1L
(P/N 2116-XX-111X)
BP
2+28 VDC
4
+28 VDC POWER
POWER GND
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
TP
11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
11D 24
12C 24
12D 24
DATA CLK
+5 VDC
DATA I/O
GND
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1L
(P/N 2116-XX-111X)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
20
20
16
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
DISCRETE INPUT #3
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
YELLLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
3
3
6
5
1 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
3 IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF
THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
4 UNS1L SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS).
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
5
6
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
NOTE:
VHF ANTENNA
5
VHF ANTENNA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 323
23-20-06 15 December 2011
L. UL-801 to UNS-1Ew
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1005.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1Ew
(P/N 3017-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
P1
P2
P1
P2
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
#1 UNS-1Ew
(P/N 3017-XX-2XX)
4
2
----CONTINUED----
DISCRETE OUTPUT
9
10
7
11
CPDLC
CNECT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
+28 VDC
5
6
6
6
8
15
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
r
t
r
t
Z
W
Z
W
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 324
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
11D 24
12C 24
12D 24
DATA CLK
+5 VDC
DATA I/O
GND
CONFIG
MODULE
12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
16
5A
220
20
14
DISCRETE INPUT #3
DISCRETE INPUT #4
13
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
NOTES:
VHF ANTENNA
CONFIGURE: SERIAL LOW RESOLUTION DISPLAY.
4
UNS1Ew SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
2
1REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
3IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
5WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
6ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
11 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
10 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
7CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
8CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
12
13 DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
14 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
12
9CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
5
VHF ANTENNA
15 WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 325
23-20-06 15 December 2011
M. UL-801 to UNS-1Espw
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429
TX #1 (FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Espw
(P/N 3019-XX-2XX)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429
RX #1 (FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429
RX #2 (FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
MP
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429
TX #2 (FMS 2)
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
9A
9B
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422
DISPLAY
DATA TX
MP
TP
50
49
48
47
P2
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
#2 UNS-1Espw
(P/N 3019-XX-2XX)
50
49
48
47
P2
2
----CONTINUED----
DISCRETE OUTPUT
9
8
10
CPDLC
CNECT
6
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
7
+28 VDC
4
5
5
5
14
15
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 326
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2
MP
BP
+28 VDC POWER +28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
TP
11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
11D 24
12C 24
12D 24
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
20
16
5A
220
20
11
12
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
DATA CLK
+5 VDC
DATA I/O
GND
CONFIG
MODULE
VHF ANTENNA
13
10
6
7
5
8
4
UNS1Espw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
2
3
9
1REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE
WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE.
11
ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
12
13
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
NOTES:
5
VHF ANTENNA
14 WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 327
23-20-06 15 December 2011
N. UL-801 to UNS-1Lw
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
NOTES ARE CONTINED ON THE NEXT PAGE.
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
NOTES:
2DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
1CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
BP
+28 VDC POWER 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
20
20
16
VHF ANTENNA
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Lw
(P/N 3116-XX-111X)
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION
MODULE (P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D 24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
#2 UNS-1Lw
(P/N 3116-XX-111X)
A
B
ARINC
429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC
429 TX
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
DISCRETE INPUT #3
4
4
5
YELLLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
1
6
2
3
5
5
5
6
DISCRETE OUTPUT
9
11
10
8
12 CPDLC
CNECT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
7
+28 VDC
5
13
8
8
VHF ANTENNA
14
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 328
23-20-06 15 December 2011
NOTES continued
5REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
6IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
11 CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
7WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
8ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
13 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
12 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
9CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
10 CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
4UNS1Lw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA.
3IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
14
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 329
23-20-06 15 December 2011
O. UL-801 with FANS to UNS-1Fw
(1) Sheet 1 of 2
NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS.
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
A1A
B1B
ARINC 429 TX #1
(FMS 1)
#1 UNS-1Fw
2192-X0-111XXX
TP
DATA CLK 11C
CONFIGURATION MODULE
(P/N 108009)
24
+5 VDC 11D 24
DATA I/O 12C 24
GND 12D
24
CONFIG
MODULE
MP
DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN
(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED)
A
B
ARINC 429 RX
A1C
B1D
ARINC 429 RX #1
(FMS 1)
A
B
HS ARINC 429 TX
#2 UNS-Fw
2192-X0-111XXX
A
B
ARINC 429 RX
A2C
B2D
ARINC 429 RX #2
(FMS 2)
A
B
HS ARINC 429 TX
----CONTINUED----
A2A
B2B
ARINC 429 TX #2
(FMS 2)
YELLOW
RED
BLUE
BROWN
4
5
1
3
2
BP
+28 VDC POWER 2+28 VDC
POWER GND 4
CHASSIS GND 3
5A
20
20
16
VHF ANTENNA
DISCRETE OUTPUT
7
9
11
10
8
12
CPDLC
CNECT
6
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
4
4
4
5
7
7+28 VDC
5
VHF ANTENNA
15
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 330
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5” FPCDU/MCDU
TP
9A
9B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX
9C
9D
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #3
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX
P3
P3
E
F
B
C
D
E
F
B
C
DSHIELD GND
SHIELD GND
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
----CONTINUED----
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX
1413
1413
BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER.
14
BOTH THE 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-2-X1X AND 1018-2-X1X, SUPPORT BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA).
OTHER 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-X-X00 AND 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY.
13
4REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS.
1CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK.
5IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE.
2DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.
3IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED.
7ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED.
12 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
11 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
10 CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT.
8CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
9CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL.
6WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT.
ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS.
NOTES:
#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU
(P/N 1117-X-X1X,
P/N 1018-X-X1X,
P/N 1025-XX-XXX)
WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED.
15
CONFIGURE AS A LO-RES DISPLAY.
16
16
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 331
23-20-06 15 December 2011
P. UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later)
DISCRETE OUTPUT
2
NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
3
1
2ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE
OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED.
OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT).
2
2
4
6
1
4
6
5
7
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
5
7
CPDLC
CNECT
ANNUNCIATOR
P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC
3
WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED.
CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL.
CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS
DISCRETE OUTPUT
DISCRETE OUTPUT
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 332
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Q. UL-801 to EFI-890R – High Resolution
#1 NAV DISPLAY
(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX)
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TP
A
B
#2 NAV DISPLAY
(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX )
1
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #4
7A
7D
7C
7B
4
2
6D
6C
6A
6B
3
4
1
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 1. PORT #4 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE.
USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE FOR EXAMPLE.
EFI-890Rs ARE HIGH RESOLUTION DEVICES, ONE DEVICE MAXIMUM PER PORT. THEREFORE, THE UNILINK MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED
BELOW. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS CAN BE INSTALLED AND CONFIGURED.
4
2
3
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 2. PORT #5 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE.
SELECT SERIAL
PORT 4 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1
PORT 5 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 2
RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4
UNILINK NODE ID: 35
I/O CONFIG:
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE SELECT 19.2 KBS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SELECT CDU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SELECT CDU, HR2
EFI-890R ND #1 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4
J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4
UNILINK NODE ID: 45
EFI-890R ND #2 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
RETURN/SHIELD
RS-422 TX
RS-422 RX
RETURN/SHIELD
RETURN/SHIELD
RS-422 TX
RS-422 RX
RETURN/SHIELD
2
P1
P1
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #5
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #5
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #4
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
27
47
46
16
27
47
46
16
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU, FPCDU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2 CDU, HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 333
23-20-06 15 December 2011
R. UL-801 to MFD-640 – High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later)
MFD-640
P/N 6402-XXXXX-XX
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TP P1
RETURN/SHIELD
B
A
B
A
1
RS-422 TX #1
RS-422 RX #1
7A
7D
7C
7B
1
USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE EXAMPLES. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS MAY BE USED.
SELECT SERIAL
PORT 4 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1
I/O CONFIG:
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
RS-422 MENU
J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY
RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK
J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 38400
MFD-640 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
UNILINK NODE ID: 35
BAUD RATE: 38.4K
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE SELECT 19.2 KBPS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW
1
NOTE: UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION CONFGURATION SETTINGS REQUIRE MFD-640-SCN 1011.4.8 OR LATER.
THE UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION MFD MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED BELOW.
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU, FPCDU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2 CDU, HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE.
A
B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA TX #4
A
B
RS-422 DISPLAY
DATA RX #4 46
58
47
57
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 334
23-20-06 15 December 2011
S. UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) – Low Resolution
RS-422 TX
TP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
2
RS-422 RX
J3
E
D
C
B
F
J3
E
D
C
B
F
J3
E
D
C
B
F
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #1
4 or 5 FPCDU #2
RCDU
4 or 5 FPCDU #3
NOTES:
1.
A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY
OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED.
2
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
SELECT AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY
I/O CONFIG:
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE SELECT 19.2 KBPS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3
CONFIGURATION NOTES
1. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU.
2. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU.
3. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU.
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU CDU, FPCDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU CDU, MFD-LR
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE.
E
D
C
B
F
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 335
23-20-06 15 December 2011
T. UL-801 to MFD-640 - Low Resolution (MFD-640 SCN 1011.4.7 or
earlier)
RS-422 TX
TP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
2
RS-422 RX
J3
E
D
C
B
F
J3
E
D
C
B
F
J3
E
D
C
B
F
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
RS-422
DISPLAY
TX
RS-422
DISPLAY
RX
GROUND
4 or 5 FPCDU #1
4 or 5 FPCDU #2
MFD-640
4 or 5 FPCDU #3
NOTES:
1.
A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY
OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED.
2
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
SELECT SERIAL AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY
I/O CONFIG:
UNILINK CONFIGURATION
GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE SELECT 19.2 KBPS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3
CONFIGURATION NOTES
1. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU.
2. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU.
3. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU.
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, MFD-LR CDU, FPCDU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU CDU, MFD-LR
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE.
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
3
3
REFER TO THE MFD-640 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PORT SELECTIONS.
RS-422 MENU
J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY
RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1
RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU
J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK
J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 19200
MFD-640 CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU
UNILINK NODE ID: 40
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 336
23-20-06 15 December 2011
U. UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR
2
1SPEED STRAP
GND = HS
VALID
GND = VALID DATALINK
ARINC 429
RX
H
L
48
18
10
12
CVR-120A, CVR-120R,
CVFDR-145, CVFDR-145R
ARINC 429 TX
H
B
HS OUTPUT TO CVR/CVFDR 3
3
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
PIN 48 (DATA LINK SPEED STRAP) SETS THE ARINC 429 RX PORT TO HIGH OR LOW SPEED. UNILINK TRANSMITS 429 HIGH SPEED AND THEREFORE MUST BE
GROUNDED AS SHOWN.
1
3CONNECT TO ANY AVALABLE ARINC TX PORT, CONFIGURE FOR HIGH SPEED, AND SET THE PORT TO CVR. RECEIVE PORTS ARE NOT REQUIRED AT THIS TIME.
2PIN 12 (VALID) DATA LINK VALID MUST BE GROUNDED AS SHOWN TO ENABLE DATA LINK RECORDING. IF THIS PIN IS GROUNDED WITH NO COMMUNICATION
FROM A DATA LINK, A CVR FAIL (AMBER LED) WILL BE PRESENT ON THE COCKPIT CONTROL UNIT (CCU).
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 337
23-20-06 15 December 2011
V. UL-801 to DTU-100
W. UL-801 to SSDTU
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX) TP
+
-
+
-
J
K
L
N
+
-
+
-
ETHERNET
RX CH 3
ETHERNET
TX CH 3
DTU-100
(P/N 1406-01-X)
P2
1
P
2
ETHERNET RX
ETHERNET TX
ETHERNET SHIELD ETHERNET SHIELD
1ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 646 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE). P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
2THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART IN THIS MANUAL.
3THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
3
6
2
7
1ETHERNET
RX CH3
ETHERNET
TX CH3
13 SHIELD
+
-
+
-
1
TP
ETHERNET
RX
ETHERNET
TX
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
ETHERNET SHIELD
+
-
+
-
2
4
4
NOTES:
2THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE
LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
3THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THE MANUAL.
USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
1
4THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER.
3
SSDTU
(P/N 1408-00-X)
3
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 338
23-20-06 15 December 2011
X. UL-801 to Portable DTU-100
Y. UL-801 to Portable SSDTU
NOTE: It is strongly recommended that customer’s using a DTU-100 upgrade to the
SSDTU.
PORTABLE DTU-100
(P/N 1407-01-1)
-
+
-
+
ETHERNET SHIELD
1
2
THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE
PORTABLE DTU.
1
2ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T AVIONICS USE) P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
UL-801
P/N 10801-XX
3
ETHERNET RX
ETHERNET TX K
L
N
J
P
ETHERNET
RX CH3
H
L
H
L
ETHERNET
TX CH3
ETHERNET SHIELD
BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR P2
K
L
N
J
P
K
L
N
J
P
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
3
6
2
7
1
6
2
7
1
PORTABLE SSDTU
(P/N 1409-00-2)
-
+
-
+
ETHERNET SHIELD
1
2
THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE
PORTABLE SSDTU.
1
2USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
UL-801
P/N 10801-XX
3
3
4
THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG.
THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL.
ETHERNET RX
ETHERNET TX
13 13
ETHERNET
RX CH3
+
-
+
-
ETHERNET
TX CH1
6
2
7
1
SHIELD #3
4
13
J2 BULKHEAD
CONNECTOR
HARNESS
(P/N 81140821) P2
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 339
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Z. UL-801 Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems
(1) UL-801 to Aero-M – without FANS
(2) UL-801 to ARINC 741 Satellite Communication (SatCom) Packet Data –
without FANS
4A 14 TXD
4C 13 RXD
MP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
TT-3000 AERO-M
(P/N 403068A-UAT)
TP
3A 16 GND
1
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
SIGNAL NAMES ARE IDENTIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ARE NOT USED TO IMPLY SIGNAL DIRECTION.
1
NOTES:
1
TX
RS-232 #1 RX
GND
13A
ARINC 429 TX
PORT #3 SATCOM
13B
TP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX) TT-5000 AERO-I
(P/N 4050033A-UAT-XXX)
ARINC 429 RX
PORT #6 SATCOM
BP
15A
15B
42
43
44
45
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
CMU #1 & #2
OUTPUT PORT
(ARINC 429)
CMU #2
INPUT PORT
(ARINC 429)
PRINTER
(IF APPLICABLE)
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 340
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(3) UL-801 to AirCell and Iridium Systems
(4) UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 – Channel #1
(5) UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 – Channel #2
4A
a
4C
N
MP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
AIRCELL (AGT.02)
IRIDIUM (ST3100)
AIRCELL/IRIDIUM (AST3500)
3A c
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS
CORPORATION.
RX
TX
RS-232
GND
TX
RS-232 #1 RX
GND
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
AIRCELL AXXESS
ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #1
MP Z
K
3A
4A
4C
J
AA
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
RX
TX RS-232
GND
GG
CTS
RTS
TX
RS-232 #1 RX
GND
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
AIRCELL AXXESS
ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #2
MP
3A
4A
4C
X
V
DD
Y
W
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
RX
TX RS-232
GND
CTS
RTS
TX
RS-232 #1 RX
GND
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 341
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(6) UL-801 Connections to International Communications Group (ICG)
ICS-220A
AA. UL-801 to ARINC 740/744/744A Printer
ARINC 429 BUS
ICS-220A
MP TP
TP
D6
UL-801
P/N10801-00
RX D4
MP
15A
15B
13A
RX D5
D2
TX
D1
TX
13B
D6
SHIELD
D3
SHIELD
1
A
D8
D5
1
4C
4A
3A
1THESE PIN NUMBERS ARE RECOMMENDED. HOWEVER, THE WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER.
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
A
B
B
ARINC 429 TX #3
ARINC 429 TX #6
RS-232 #1
TX
RX
GND
GND
RX
TX
RS-232
A
B
A
B
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
ALL WIRES AWG 22 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
A 14A
B 14B
A 15A
B 15B
ARINC 429 RECEIVE
PORT #4 PRINTER
A
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT
B
A
ARINC 429 RECEIVE
B
TP
PRINTER
ARINC 740 OR ARINC 744
UL801
(P/N 10801XX)
ARINC 429 TRANSMIT
PORT #3 PRINTER
SATCOM
IF APPLICABLE
1
1
1SEE THE PRINTER MANUFACTURER FOR PIN IDENTIFICATIONS.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 342
23-20-06 15 December 2011
BB. UL-801 to PC Printer
CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer
8A 3 RECEIVE DATA
8C 2 TRANSMIT DATA
3A 7SIGNAL GROUND
TP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX) GENERIC SERIAL
PRINTER
MP
DB25
4RTS
5 CTS
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
TX
RS-232 #2
RX
GND
8A 2TRANSMIT DATA
8C 3 RECEIVE DATA
3A 7 SIGNAL GROUND
TP
UL-801
(P/N 10801-XX)
SERIAL/PARALLEL
CONVERTER
(B&B 232SPS2)
MP
DB25
SERIAL DB25
PARALLEL GENERIC
PARALLEL
PRINTER
1
1
ON
9600
baud
2
ON
9600
baud
3
OFF
9600
baud
4
OFF
XON/
XOFF
5
OFF
8 Data
Bits
6
OFF
No
Parity
7
OFF/ON
Dont
Care
8
OFF
Serial/
Parity
1SET THE DIP SWITCH ON THE 232SPS2 AS FOLLOWS (DEFAULT SETTING):
CAUTION: IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.
TX
RS-232 #2
RX
GND
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 343
23-20-06 15 December 2011
3. UL-801 Connector Pin Identification
A. Top Plug
NOTE: Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 top plug are shown in
the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use when
upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801.
Pin UL-801 Function UL-701 Function
1A 10/100BT Ethernet (+) TX #1 Same
1B 10/100BT Ethernet (-) TX #1 Same
1C 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #1 Same
1D 10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #1 Same
2A ARINC 429 RX (A) #14 Same
2B ARINC 429 RX (B) #14 Same
2C ARINC 429 RX (A) #13 Same
2D ARINC 429 RX (B) #13 Same
3A 10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #2 Essential RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #8
3B 10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #2 Essential RS-422 TX (B) #8
3C 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #2 Essential RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX #8
3D 10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #2 Essential RS-422 RX (B) #8
4A 10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #3 Essential RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #7
4B 10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #3 Essential RS-422 TX (B) #7
4C 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #3 Essential RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX#7
4D 10/100BT Ethernet RX #3 (-) Essential RS-422 RX (B) #7
5A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #6 Same
5B RS-422 (B) TX #6 Same
5C RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #6 Same
5D RS-422 (B) RX #6 Same
6A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #5 Same
6B RS-422 (B) TX #5 Same
6C RS-422 (A) /RS-232 RX #5 Same
6D RS-422 (B) RX #5 Same
7A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #4 Same
7B RS-422 (B) TX #4 Same
7C RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #4 Same
7D RS-422 (B) RX #4 Same
8A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #2 Same
8B RS-422 (B) TX #2 Same
8C RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #2 Same
8D RS-422 (B) RX #2 Same
9A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #3 Same
9B RS-422 (B) TX #3 Same
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 344
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Top Plug - continued
Pin UL-801 Function UL-701 Function
9C RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #3 Same
9D RS-422 (B) RX #3 Same
10A RS-232 TX Same
10B RS-232 RX Same
10C RS-232 GND Same
10D Discrete Out #1 Same
11A ARINC 429 (A) TX #4 Same
11B ARINC 429 (B) TX #4 Same
11C Config Mod Clock Same
11D Config Mod Power Same
12A ARINC 429 (A) RX #8 Same
12B ARINC 429 (B) RX #8 Same
12C Config Mod Data (I/O) Same
12D Config Mod GND Same
13A ARINC 429 (A) RX #6 Same
13B ARINC 429 (B) RX #6 Same
13C ARINC 429 (A) RX #7 Same
13D ARINC 429 (B ) RX #7 Same
14A ARINC 429 (A) RX #4 Same
14B ARINC 429 (B) RX #4 Same
14C ARINC 429 (A) RX #5 Same
14D ARINC 429 (B) RX #5 Same
15A ARINC 429 (A) TX #3 Same
15B ARINC 429 (B) TX #3 Same
15C ARINC 429 (A) RX #3 Same
15D ARINC 429 (B) RX #3 Same
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 345
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. Middle Plug
NOTE: Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 middle plug are
shown in the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use
when upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801.
Pin UL-801 Function UL-701 Function
1A ARINC 429 (A) TX #1 Same
1B ARINC 429 (B) TX #1 Same
1C ARINC 429 (A) RX #1 Same
1D ARINC 429 (B) RX #1 Same
2A ARINC 429 (A) TX #2 Same
2B ARINC 429 (B) TX #2 Same
2C ARINC 429 (A) RX #2 Same
2D ARINC 429 (B) RX #2 Same
3A RS-232 GND Same
3B ARINC 429 (A) RX #12 Same
3C ARINC 429 (B) RX #12 Same
3D ARINC 429 (A) RX #11 Same
4A RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #1 Same
4B RS-422 (B) TX #1 Same
4C RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #1 Same
4D RS-422 (B) RX #1 Same
5A Discrete Out #14 Same
5B ARINC 429 (A) TX #5 Discrete Out #15
5C ARINC 429 (B) TX #5 Discrete Out #16
5D ARINC 429 (B) RX #11 Same
6A Discrete Out #10 Same
6B Discrete Out #11 Same
6C Discrete Out #12 Same
6D Discrete Out #13 Same
7A Discrete Out #6 Same
7B Discrete Out #7 Same
7C Discrete Out #8 Same
7D Discrete Out #9 Same
8A Discrete Out #2 Same
8B Discrete Out #3 Same
8C Discrete Out #4 Same
8D Discrete Out #5 Same
9A ARINC 429 (A) TX #6 Discrete In #13
9B ARINC 429 (B) TX #6 Discrete In #14
9C ARINC 429 (A) TX #7 Discrete In #15
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 346
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Middle Plug - continued
Pin UL-801 Function UL-701 Function
9D ARINC 429 (B) TX #7 Discrete In #16
10A Discrete In #9 Same
10B Discrete In #10 Same
10C ARINC 429 (A) RX #15 Discrete In #11
10D ARINC 429 (B) RX #15 Discrete In #12
11A Discrete In #5 Same
11B Discrete In #6 Same
11C Discrete In #7 Same
11D Discrete In #8 Same
12A Discrete In #2 Same
12B Discrete In #3 Same
12C Discrete In #4 Same
12D ARINC 429 (A) RX #10 Same
13A ARINC 429 (A) RX #16 Telephone Ring (Modem I/F)
13B ARINC 429 (A) RX #9 Same
13C ARINC 429 (B) RX #9 Same
13D ARINC 429 (B) RX #10 Same
14A ARINC 429 (B) RX #16 Telephone Tip (Modem I/F)
14B Spare PTT Radio
14C Chassis GND Gnd Rtn VHF-ACARS (VHF Radio)
14D Discrete In #1 Same
15A ARINC 429 (A) TX #8 VHF Modem TX (+)
15B ARINC 429 (B) TX #8 VHF Modem TX (-)
15C Spare VHF Modem RX (+)
15D Spare VHF Modem RX (-)
C. Bottom Plug
Pin UL-801 Function UL-701 Function
1 Spare Same
2 +28 VDC Same
3 Chassis GND Same
4 Power GND Same
5 VHF Antenna Same
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 347
23-20-06 15 December 2011
4. UL-801 Connectors
UL-801 Connector Rack Connector
NOTE: The darkened portion of the keying above indicates the extended part of the key;
the light portion indicates the key hole.
Top Plug
Bottom Plug
Middle Plug
1
32
5
4
A
CBD
A
CBD
A
CBD
A
CBD
1
10 10
5
1
15 15
5
1
10 10
5
1
15 15
5
1
3
2
5
4
ACBD
ACBD
ACBD
ACBD
1
10 10
5
1
15 15
5
1
10 10
5
1
15 15
5
ARINC Key
Code #08
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 401
23-20-06 15 December 2011
System Data Installation
1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
Aircraft Type Designators
When installing system data during the configuration process, the ICAO aircraft type
designator is used. The following tables contain examples of commonly used ICAO
designators for various aircraft. Use ICAO Document 8643, found under “Publications” at
http://www.icao.int/, to ascertain the correct designator for your aircraft.
Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator
AIRBUS
A-300 A300
A-310 A310
ATR
ATR-42/72 ATR
BAC
111 One-eleven BA111
BEECH
90, A90 to E90 King Air BE9L
200, 1300 Super King Air BE20
300 Super King Air BE30
B300 Super King Air 350 B350
400 Beechjet MU30
1900 (C-12J) B190
BELL
212, 412 B12
214ST BSTP
222, 230, 430 B222
BOEING
707 B708
727 (C-22) B727
737-100/200 (CT-43) B73A
737-300/400/500 B73B
747-100/200/300 (E-4, VC-25) B74A
747SP B74S
757 B757
C135 C135
BRITISH AEROSPACE
BAC 111 One-eleven BA11
BAe-125-700/801 (C-29) H25B
BAe-125-1000 H25C
BAe-146, RJ BA46
BAe-4100 Jetstream 41 JSTB
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 402
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator
CANADAIR
CL-600/601/604 Challenger CL60
RJ Regional Jet CARJ
CESSNA
F406 Caravan 2 F406
441 Conquest, Conquest 2 C441
500, 501 Citation, Citation 1/1SP C500
525 Citation Jet C525
526 Citation Jet C526
550, S550, 551, 552 Citation
2/S2/2SP/Bravo
C550
560 Citation 5 C560
650 Citation 3/6/7 C650
DASSAULT
Falcon 10, Mystere 10 FA10
Falcon 20, Mystere 20 FA20
Falcon 50, Mystere 20 FA50
Falcon 900, Mystere 900 F900
Falcon 2000 F2TH
DEHAVILLAND CANADA
DHC-6 Twin Otter DHC6
DHC-7 Dash 7 DHC7
DHC-8 Dash 8 DHC8
DOUGLAS
DC-8 DC8
DC-9 DC9
EMBRAER
EMB-110/111 Bandeirante E110
EMB-120 Brasilia E120
EMB-145 E145
EMB-140 E140
EUROCOPTER
AS-365/565 Dauphin AS65
BK-117 BK17
FOKKER
50 F50
GRUMMAN
G-159 Gulfstream 1 G159
G-1159 Gulfstream 2 GULF
Albatross U16
GULFSTREAM AEROSPACE
Gulfstream 3/4/5 GULF
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 403
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator
HAWKER
HS-124-400/600 H25A
HS-125-700 H25B
IAI
1123 Westwind WW23
1124 Westwind WW24
1125 Astra ASTR
Galaxy GLAX
ILYUSHIN
IL96 IL96
LEARJET
31 LJ31
35 LJ35
45 LJ45
55 LJ55
60 LJ60
LOCKHEED
C-130 C130
L-1011 Tristar L101
McDONNELL DOUGLAS
DC-8 DC8
DC-9 DC9
DC-10 DC10
MD-81/82/83/87/88 MD80
MD-90 MD90
MITSUBISHI
MU-300 Diamond MU30
PIPER
PA-42 Cheyenne 3/400 PA42
RAYTHEON
90 King Air BE9L
200 Super King Air (C-12) BE20
300 Super King Air BE30
B300 Super King Air 350 B350
400 Beechjet MU30
1900 B190
Hawker 801 H25B
Hawker 1000 H25C
REIMS
F406 Caravan 2 F406
SIKORSKY
S-70 H60
S-76 S76
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 404
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator
TUPOLEV
Tu-154 T154
WESTLAND
Puma PUMA
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 405
23-20-06 15 December 2011
2. Configuration Worksheets
Universal Avionics Systems Corporation recommends that the following worksheets be
completed in order to assist with configuring the UniLink Configuration Module. One set of
worksheets should be filled out and a copy given to the customer. Fill in the blanks and
check the appropriate boxes based on the wiring of the aircraft and its set of avionics
components. Further, these worksheets may be submitted along with other approval
paperwork. A copy of these worksheets should be filed along with the aircraft paper work for
future reference.
NOTE: • A customer database is installed in each UniLink.
• You are hereby authorized to reproduce these worksheets as well as the
configuration module programming procedures if desired.
• It is recommended that the current UniLink configuration be recorded prior
to updating to a new UniLink software version. UniLink may not maintain
previous configuration settings with a software upgrade.
The default value for each option in the worksheets is underlined. Pressing the RETURN
LSK returns you to the menu from which you started.
UniLink input consists of one of the three following character types. Where necessary, each
field on the worksheets designates which type to use.
Types of character input allowed
Alpha
Shown as “A” on the worksheets.
Alpha characters are the 26 characters of the
alphabet.
Numeric
Shown as “N” on the worksheets.
Numeric characters consist of the numbers 0 to 9.
Alphanumeric
Shown as “AN” on the worksheets.
Alphanumeric characters are a combination of
letters (including both upper and lower case) and
numbers. Alphanumeric input can also contain
punctuation marks, and mathematical and other
conventional symbols (such as @, &, and *).
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 406
23-20-06 15 December 2011
A. Customer/Aircraft Information
Customer Name: _________________________________________________
Customer Address: _________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
_________________________________________________
Aircraft Manufacturer: _________________________________________________
Aircraft Model No.: _________________________________________________
Aircraft Serial No.: _________________________________________________
Configuration Date: _________________________________________________
Technician: _________________________________________________
B. System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4)
NOTE: Configuration options may be used only once. Any option that has been selected is
removed from the option list.
1. I/O Config
a) DISCRETE (DISC) IN
• Active state of BRAKE SET indicates the parking brake is locked.
• Active state of DOOR CLOSED indicates the configured door is closed.
• Active state of STRUT COMP (Strut Compressed) indicates the aircraft is on-
ground (weight on wheels).
• The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only.
DISC IN 1/4
DISC IN 1
Middle Plug 14D
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 2
Middle Plug 12A
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 3
Middle Plug 12B
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 407
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Press NEXT. DISC IN 2/4 displays.
DISC IN 4
Middle Plug 12C
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 5
Middle Plug 11A
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 6
Middle Plug 11B
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
Press NEXT. DISC IN 3/4 displays.
DISC IN 7
Middle Plug 11C
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 8
Middle Plug 11D
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC IN 9
Middle Plug 10A
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
Press NEXT. DISC IN 4/4 displays.
DISC IN 10
Middle Plug 10B
NOT USED BRAKE SET STRUT COMP TEST
DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 408
23-20-06 15 December 2011
b) DISCRETE (DISC) OUT
• FANS VISUAL
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The FANS VISUAL output discrete activates the ATC annunciator and
alerts the crew that an ATC advisory is active and the UniLink pages should
be accessed to view further information.
• FANS AURAL
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable. Duration is
configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The FANS AURAL output discrete activates the aural warning device and
alerts the crew that an aural message has been received.
• CPDLC CNECT (Connect)
− Output – Active Open or Active Ground configurable.
− Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly.
− The CPDLC CNECT output discrete activates an optional CPDLC CNECT
annunciator while the UniLink is connected to the Current Data Authority
(CDA).
− If the CDA connection is disrupted or lost, the optional CPDLC CNECT
annunciator deactivates.
• The New Message (NEW MSG) discretes are provided to drive visual
indications of new/unread uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink
exists.
• The CHIME discretes are provided to drive aural indications of new/unread
uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink exists.
• VHF/SAT/TEL NOCOMM discretes are provided to drive visual indications
media link states. Active state indicates a particular medium is in NOCOMM
(link not established).
DISC OUT 1/5
DISC OUT 1
Top Plug 10D
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 2
Middle Plug 8A
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 409
23-20-06 15 December 2011
DISC OUT 1/5 (Continued)
DISC OUT 3 Middle
Plug 8B
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 2/5 displays.
DISC OUT 4 Middle
Plug 8C
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 5 Middle
Plug 8D
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 6 Middle
Plug 7A
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 3/5 displays.
DISC OUT 7 Middle
Plug 7B
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 8 Middle
Plug 7C
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 9 Middle
Plug 7D
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 410
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Press NEXT. DISC OUT 4/5 displays.
DISC OUT 10
Middle Plug 6A
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 11
Middle Plug 6B
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 12
Middle Plug 6C
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 13
Middle Plug 6D
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
DISC OUT 14
Middle Plug 5A
NOT USED VOX ANNUN NEW MSG 1 NEW MSG 2
VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL
CHIME 1 CHIME 2 FANS VISUAL FANS AURAL
CPDLC CNECT
ACTIVE STATE GROUND OPEN
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 411
23-20-06 15 December 2011
c) ARINC RECEIVE
• Only one device/interface may configured on each ARINC receive port at a
time.
• UniLink configures the receive port speed based on the device selected.
− The receive port speed for the following devices are configured for low
speed: MCDU, Printer, A741 SDU, A604 CMC, IOP.
− The receive port speed for the following devices are configured based on the
device definition contained within the CDB: A702 FMS, Generic 429
Device.
− UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the
following devices and configures the receive port speed accordingly:
A743A GNSS (including A743 GPS), DADC (Digital ADC).
• UniLink processes data labels received from A702 FMS and Generic 429
Device based on the device definition contained within the CDB.
• Devices configured on a receive port must also be configured on a transmit port
except for the following receive-only devices: IOP, A743A GNSS (including
A743 GPS), DADC.
• The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only.
ARINC RX 1/3
PORT 1
(A) Middle Plug 1C
(B) Middle Plug 1D
Only FMS/CDU1 is may be chosen for this
port.
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3
PORT 2
(A) Middle Plug 2C
(B) Middle Plug 2D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
Generic1 - 4 identifies up to four optional, generic input devices which can be
included in a customer database.
PORT 3
(A) Top Plug 15C
(B) Top Plug 15D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 4
(A) Top Plug 14A
(B) Top Plug 14B
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 412
23-20-06 15 December 2011
ARINC RX 1/3 (CONTINUED)
PORT 5
(A) Top Plug 14C
(B) Top Plug 14D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 6
(A) Top Plug 13A
(B) Top Plug 13B
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
Press NEXT. ARINC RX 2/3 displays.
PORT 7
(A) Top Plug 13C
(B) Top Plug 13D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 8
(A) Top Plug 12A
(B) Top Plug 12B
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 9
(A) Middle Plug 13B
(B) Middle Plug 13C
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 10
(A) Middle Plug 12D
(B) Middle Plug 13D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 413
23-20-06 15 December 2011
ARINC RX 2/3 (Continued)
PORT 11
(A) Middle Plug 3D
(B) Middle Plug 5D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 12
(A) Middle Plug 3B
(B) Middle Plug 3C
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
Press NEXT. ARINC RX 3/3 displays.
PORT 13
(A) Top Plug 2C
(B) Top Plug 2D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 14
(A) Top Plug 2A
(B) Top Plug 2B
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 15
(A) Middle Plug 10C
(B) Middle Plug 10D
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
PORT 16
(A) Middle Plug 13A
(B) Middle Plug 14A
NOT USED FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3
740 PRINT 741 SDU VM CMC 604 CMC
DHC8 IOP1 DHC8 IOP2 MCDU2 MCDU3
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 743A GNSS
750 VDR TEST ADC1 ADC2
GENERIC1 GENERIC2 GENERIC3 GENERIC4
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 414
23-20-06 15 December 2011
d) ARINC TRANSMIT
NOTE: • If any ARINC TX port is selected as 741 SDU, then SAT must be
selected as the Normal or Alternate option in the PRIORITY (SYS
CONFIG 1/4) option page.
• If an ARINC TX choice is displayed in small print and there is no arrow
pointing to an LSK that selection is not available for use.
• VOX tune bus can only be configured for one port.
ARINC TX 1/3
PORT 1
(A) Middle Plug 1A
(B) Middle Plug 1B
NOTE: Only TX port with a default.
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST NOTE: Test is used by the Engineering Development
only. DO NOT CONFIGURE.
PORT 1 SPEED LOW NOTE: LOW is the only configurable option.
PORT 2
(A) Middle Plug 2A
(B) Middle Plug 2B
Ports 2-16 have no default settings.
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 2 SPEED LOW HIGH
PORT 3
(A) Top Plug 15A
(B) Top Plug 15B
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 3 SPEED LOW HIGH
Press NEXT. ARINC TX 2/3 displays.
PORT 4
(A) Top Plug 11A
(B) Top Plug 11B
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 4 SPEED LOW HIGH
PORT 5
(A) Middle Plug 5B
(B) Middle Plug 5C
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 5 SPEED LOW HIGH
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 415
23-20-06 15 December 2011
ARINC TX 2/3 (Continued)
PORT 6
(A) Middle Plug 9A
(B) Middle Plug 9B
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 6 SPEED LOW HIGH
Press NEXT. ARINC TX 3/3 displays.
PORT 7
(A) Middle Plug 9C
(B) Middle Plug 9D
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 7 SPEED LOW HIGH
PORT 8
(A) Middle Plug 15A
(B) Middle Plug 15B
FMS/CDU1 FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT
741 SDU VOX TUNE VM CMC 604 CMC
MCDU1 MCDU2 MCDU3 CVR
702 FMS1 702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR
TEST
PORT 8 SPEED LOW HIGH
e) SERIAL
SERIAL 1/2
PORT 1
TX:
(+) Middle Plug 4A
(−)Middle Plug 4B
RX:
(+)Middle Plug 4C
(−)Middle Plug 4D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
PORT 2
TX:
(+) Top Plug 8A
(−) Top Plug 8B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 8C
(−) Top Plug 8D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
PORT 3
TX:
(+) Top Plug 9A
(−) Top Plug 9B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 9C
(−) Top Plug 9D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 416
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Press NEXT. SERIAL 2/2 displays.
PORT 4
TX:
(+) Top Plug 7A
(−) Top Plug 7B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 7C
(−) Top Plug 7D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
PORT 5
TX:
(+) Top Plug 6A
(−) Top Plug 6B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 6C
(−) Top Plug 6D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
PORT 6
TX:
(+) Top Plug 5A
(−) Top Plug 5B
RX:
(+) Top Plug 5C
(−) Top Plug 5D
NOT USED LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER
VHF GND SIM SAT GND SIM IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 417
23-20-06 15 December 2011
f) GRAPHICS
• Low Resolution Display Devices
These devices include all CDUs, MCDUs, RCDUs, MFD-640 (with MFD SCN
1011.4.7 or earlier). A maximum total of four display devices may be used
within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:
• High Resolution Display Devices
These devices include all EFI-890Rs and MFD-640 (with MFD SCN 1011.4.8
or later). Additionally, a maximum total of two high resolution display devices
may be included within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:
• CDU Graphics
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU1.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU2.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU3.
Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same
graphic but in a high resolution format.
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPH ICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU CDU, FPC DU
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CD U2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU CD U, MFD-LR
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CD U3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY AD DITIONAL SELECTION S WILL RESULT IN AN ERR OR MESSAGE.
EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU1 GRAPH ICS DISP ON
CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU, FPC DU, HR1
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CD U2 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU, HR2 CD U, H R2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CD U3 GRAPHICS DISP ON
CDU
ANY AD DITIONAL SELECTION S WILL RESULT IN AN ERR OR MESSAGE.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 418
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Graphics Setup
CDU/MFD BAUD RATE 9600 BPS 19.2 KBPS
CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON
There are no defaults. CDU option(s) do not need to be
selected if weather graphics are not used.
LR = Low Resolution; HR = High Resolution
RCDU = Remote CDU
CDU RCDU MFD-LR HR1
HR2
CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU RCDU MFD-LR HR1
HR2
CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU RCDU MFD-LR HR1
HR2
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 419
23-20-06 15 December 2011
2. VHF CONFIG
VHF CONFIG 1/2
RADIO TYPE NONE INTERNAL VDR
Internal VDR must be
selected if VHF is
configured to other than
NONE.
ARINC 750 VDR
CONTACT TIMER ENABLED DISABLED
The contact timer verifies that the current VHF frequency is still usable when the channel has not had any uplink
traffic received for a period of time. Enabling this option provides better media management performance.
TRACKER TIMER ENABLED DISABLED
The tracker timer provides flight following information to the DSP. This setting is enabled by default to provide
better ACARS link management performance.
PREFERRED DSP NONE ARINC SITA AVICOM
NOTE: Although the Preferred DSP is selected with this option, the ARINC, SITA, and AVICOM options may
also be enabled/disabled using the listed options. For further coverage information, contact your DSP.
ARINC ENABLED DISABLED
SITA ENABLED DISABLED
AVICOM ENABLED DISABLED
Press NEXT. VHF CONFIG 2/2 displays.
ENABLED MODE(S) POA/AOA AOA ONLY POA ONLY
MINIMUM SQP
(Minimum VHF Signal
Quality)
Range is 3 – 15; 4
SQP THRESHOLD Range is 3 – 15; 12
VOICE FREQ CONTROL ENABLED 25KHZ ENABLED 8.33/25KHZ DISABLED
VOICE FREQ CONTROL must
be set to DISABLED for the
UniLink 801.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 420
23-20-06 15 December 2011
3. SAT CONFIG
SAT CONFIG
TRACKER TIMER ENABLED DISABLED
The tracker timer provides flight following information to the service provider once every four hours during SatCom
medium inactivity. This setting should be enabled to provide better ACARS link management performance.
This timer is applicable when UniLink is configured with an A741 SDU. If Iridium is configured as an AIRPHONE,
the tracker timer is not active.
AUTO RETURN ENABLED DISABLED
If enabled, the UniLink attempts to re-establish the SatCom link every 10 minutes when in Satellite NOCOMM.
4. PRIORITY
NOTE: • If Aero-I SAT (ARINC 741) Packet Data Service is utilized, one of the
Normal/Alternate options must be set to SAT.
• Alternate Comm Priority, which is used for Position Reporting only,
overrides Normal Comm Priority.
COMM PRIORITY
NORMAL (Priority ranking scheme for up to three downlink communications links.)
1ST NONE VHF SAT TEL
2ND NONE VHF SAT TEL
3RD NONE VHF SAT TEL
ALTERNATE (Used for Position Reporting only.)
1ST NONE VHF SAT TEL
2ND NONE VHF SAT TEL
3RD NONE VHF SAT TEL
NOTES: • Alternate priority is only applied to automatic position reports in the UASC Corporate Customer
Database.
• Customers are able to limit Auto Position reports to only use the VHF media, SAT media, TEL
media or any two media. Likewise, users can choose to send Auto Position reports via all three
media options.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 421
23-20-06 15 December 2011
5. TEL CONFIG
TEL CONFIG 1/2
AIR PHONE
Used for dial up
modem calls only
and uses an RS-232
serial port configured
for IRIDIUM or
AERO-M. It is
primarily used for
obtaining color
weather maps but
may also provide
VHF backup.
NONE T-T AERO-M
When interfacing with Aero-M, configure the
Aero-M Data Port (via the Full Feature
Handset only, P/N 405621A) for 9600 baud,
Flow Control XON/XOFF, “+++”- Mode
Enable, Results Code Enabled and ARQ
Mode Enabled. Refer to the TT-3000 Aero-M
Installation Manual.
IRIDIUM
Baud rate selection applies to Iridium
only. Select baud rate supported by
the software version as follows:
• Confirm the UniLink baud rate
compatibility with the vendor and
the selected DSP.
• Baud rate must be one of the
following:
2400 BPS
4800 BPS
9600 BPS
• Contact the air phone
manufacturer for baud rate
compatibility with UniLink.
ACCESS NUMBER
The number dialed
by the selected AIR
PHONE. Used to
connect with the
selected Datalink
Service Provider’s
MODEM bank.
_________________________________ (Max 19 AN characters, 0-9, P,L, A)
The default value is to leave this field blank. Contact Universal Weather and Aviation
to obtain the Access Number.
Contact your DSP for the access number shown on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
A “P” may be entered to insert a pause, an “L” may be entered to insert “#”, or an “A”
may be entered to insert “*” as required by the telephony network.
Subscription service for UniLink may be obtained through Universal Weather and
Aviation, Inc. at 1-801-231-5600.
WX MAPS
(Weather Maps)
If DISABLED is
selected, it is
required that NONE
is selected in the AIR
PHONE section.
ENABLED DISABLED
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 422
23-20-06 15 December 2011
TEL CONFIG 1/2
SUSP MSG
(Suspend Message)
Enables or disables
the invocation of the
TEL SUSPEND
message following a
TEL SUSPEND
event.
ENABLED DISABLED
Press NEXT. TEL CONFIG 2/2 displays.
REDIAL PAUSE
Redial Pause specifies the wait between
telephony redial attempts from 5 to 60
seconds.
_____ Seconds (5-60 seconds; 30SEC)
DIAL ATTEMPTS
Dial Attempts specifies the total number of
dial attempts in a set from 1 to 6.
_____ Attempts (1-6 attempts; 6)
AUTO-DELAY
Auto-Delay specifies the time between
sets of redial attempts from 1 to 9 minutes.
_____ Minutes (1-9 minutes; 5MIN)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 423
23-20-06 15 December 2011
6. POS REPORT
These settings control the transmission of present position information while the aircraft is
on the ground or in the air. These transmissions are sent to the DSP and may be used to
provide flight following for aircraft tracking purposes. Transmission reporting time intervals
(INTV) may also be configured.
The POS REPORT message is periodic and defaults to every 15 minutes. If the aircraft is
configured for VHF, then SAT in the normal priority over the ocean SAT would be used for
the position report downlinks which could potentially be costly. In this case the alternate
priority would have only VHF which would prevent the downlink of automatic POS
REPORT messages when VHF was in NO COMM (i.e. it wouldn't switch to trying SAT).
POS REPORT
AUTOMATIC REPORTING:
IN AIR ENABLED DISABLED
ON GROUND ENABLED DISABLED
IN AIR DEFAULT
When ENABLED is selected, the
transmission of in air position
reporting is always turned on by
default.
When DISABLED is selected, the
transmission of in air position
reporting is always turned off by
default. Automatic Position
Reporting can be enabled or
disabled by the air crew during
flight if necessary.
ENABLED DISABLED
AIR INTV
(Air Interval)
Air intervals can be modified
during flight but always return to
the values stored in the
configuration at power up.
_________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 15MIN (1 – 99 is acceptable)
GROUND INTV
(Ground Interval) _________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 60MIN (1 – 99 is acceptable)
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 2/4 page displays.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 424
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. SYS CONFIG 2/4
SYS CONFIG 2/4
MEDIA ADVIS
(Media Advisory)
ENABLED DISABLED
MET DATA
(Meteorological Data)
ENABLED DISABLED
By enabling Met Data for Corporate and American Eagle versions, meteorological data messages are reported to
the ground once a Met data message uplink is received from the ground.
By enabling Met Data for the Air Nova version, meteorological data messages are reported upon enabling. An
uplink is not required.
FLIGHT NO. ENABLED DISABLED
Enabling the Flight Number allows the entry and display of flight number data on the UniLink Main Menu. The
INIT advisory logic will be active when Flight Number is enabled. INIT advisory logic will prompt the user to enter
Flight No data on the MAIN menu page.
OOOI DATA
(Out, Off, On, In)
Enabling OOOI is
recommended if
ARINC is selected as
the preferred DSP.
ENABLED DISABLED
AIRCRAFT
The default value for
any of the AIRCRAFT
options is to leave the
field blank.
ICAO Aircraft Type,
Aircraft Registration
and Airline ID are
required information.
TYPE (ICAO Designator) __ __ __ __ (Max 4 AN characters)
REGISTRATION __ __ __ __ __ __ __ (Max 7 AN characters)
Valid Aircraft Registration may contain alpha characters upper case A through Z, numeric
characters 0 through 9, a dash/hyphen character (which may not be the first or last
character) and from 1 to 7 characters.
AIRLINE ID __ __ / __ __ __ (Max 2 AN characters/3 AN characters)
FIN NUMBER
(Fleet Identifier Number)
__ __ __
(Max 3 AN characters)
ICAO ADDR __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __
Obtain the specific ICAO address from your DSP. This information is derived from the
registration number of the aircraft.
CLEARANCES
These settings
determine Air Traffic
Services (ATS)
functional options as
elected by the
customer.
OCEANIC ENABLED DISABLED
PUSHBACK ENABLED DISABLED
DEPARTURE ENABLED DISABLED
EXP TAXI
(Expected Taxi)
ENABLED DISABLED
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 425
23-20-06 15 December 2011
SYS CONFIG 2/4 (Continued)
ALERTS NEW MSG DISC DURATION
(New Message Discrete Duration)
ALERT1 __________________
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
ALERT2 __________________
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
CHIME1 __________________
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
CHIME2 __________________
MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 100MS
INHIB ON GND
(Inhibit on Ground) __________________
KTS (Max 3 N characters)
(Knots); 50KTS
INHIB ALT
(Inhibit Altitude) __________________
FT (Max 5 N characters)
(Feet); 10,000FT
ALT TYPE
(Altitude Type)
RADIO
RADIO type may only be
configured when IOP bus
input is used. When
RADIO is configured,
INHIB ALT must be 2500
feet or below.
BARO
AFTER OFF
Alerts are turned off during
this configured time
duration. 0MIN disables
this timer, which allows
the alerts to occur only
above the configured
INHIB ALT value.
__________________
MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 5MIN
The timer is off if set to 0MIN.
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 3/4 page displays.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 426
23-20-06 15 December 2011
D. SYS CONFIG 3/4
FANS requirements consist of the following:
• The FMS must use SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later.
• UniLink must be connected to the UNS bus from the FMS (not A429 HS bus).
• If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS enabled.
• If FANS is disabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS disabled.
SYS CONFIG 3/4
FANS
If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be
configured for it and must be at SCN
1000.5/1100.5 or later.
Special operational approval and crew
training is required to use FANS.
ENABLED DISABLED
FANS AURAL
Works in conjunction with the FANS
AURAL output discrete and controls the
duration of the FANS AURAL alert.
The default value is set to 0MS, which
means that the Alerting device will
remain active until the message that
activated the alert has been viewed.
Therefore, it is recommended to set this
time duration to some other value than
0MS. A value such as 5000MS
(5 seconds) may be suitable in most
cases.
It is recommended to set this time
duration to a specific value required to
support correct operation of the aural
alerting device, for example a
SONALERT or Aural Warning
Generating equipment.
A
value of zero is not recommended as it
can result in the loss of aural alerts from
a new message received if an unread
CPDLC message already exists. A value
such as 5000MS (5 seconds) may be
suitable in most cases ______________ MS (Max 4 N characters)
(Milliseconds); 0MS
DELAY MSG TX
(Delay Message Transmission) ______________
MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 0MIN
Provides VHF message transmission delays, in minutes, in order to ensure a reliable Line of Sight
(LOS) connection after takeoff. Messages designated for delay (within the customer database) will be
suppressed during VHF/SAT NOCOMM until the timer expires, at which time the message is routed for
delivery over Telephony.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 427
23-20-06 15 December 2011
SYS CONFIG 3/4 (Continued)
GROUND DELAY ______________ MIN (Max 2 N characters)
(Minutes); 0MIN
A Delay Advisory displays if a delay time other than zero is entered and the Delay Advisory time has
elapsed since the occurrence of the OOOI Out event.
FANS LATENCY
ATC may instruct the crew to utilize a
specific value. It’s recommended that the
value be configured for 0 (zero).
0 = latency is turned off. ______________
SEC (Max 3 N characters)
(Seconds); 0SEC
Range = 0 - 999
SUPP ADDR
(Supplemental Address)
______________
(Max 7 AN characters); the default value
is to leave the field blank.
Obtain a specific SUPP ADDRESS from your DSP.
Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 4/4 page displays. This page displays the log of the recent
Config Module Updates, which is organized by Date and Time columns.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 428
23-20-06 15 December 2011
3. Configuration Procedures
The Flight Management System (FMS) must be configured to use the UniLink
Communications Unit before you configure the UniLink system. Refer to the WAAS/SBAS
FMS Configuration Manual, report number 34-61-01, for FMS configuration procedures.
NOTE: • The UASC FMS ARINC receiver port that receives data from the UniLink
must be configured for UniLink. Only one receiver port on each FMS may be
configured for a datalink device. UniLink and AFIS are mutually exclusive.
Only one may be configured.
• The FMS transmitter port that supplies data to the UniLink must be
configured for UNS HS429-1. UNS HS429-1 is mandatory for FANS-capable
installations.
The screens throughout these procedures depict a FANS-enabled UniLink. Some screens will
appear differently without FANS.
A. Starting the FMS
In order to access the UniLink menu, press the ON/OFF/DIM key on the faceplate of the
FMS to turn it on. The FMS displays the following:
1. FMS self-test page.
NOTE: The DATABASE BANK field displays the number of the bank being tested
and the percentage complete. When successfully finished, the numbers change
to the word PASS and the FMS proceeds to the CONFIG MODULE test. All
tests display as PASS if the self-test completes correctly.
2. FMS copyright page.
UNS - 1
-------------------------
CPU PASS
RAM PASS
DATABASE BANK # 100%
CONFIG MODULE
AUXILIARY
WAAS/ARINC
COPYRIGHT 2010
UNIVERSAL AVIONICS
SYSTEMS CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 429
23-20-06 15 December 2011
3. INIT 1/1 menu.
a. LSK [1L] field is highlighted. Enter the local airport identifier.
b. Press ENTER.
4. Local Airport Identifier window.
a. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L].
b. The INIT 1/1 menu displays.
c. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L].
d. Press the DATA key.
5. DATA 1/4 menu.
a. Press the UNILINK LSK [3R].
POS INIT 1/1 Â
date
initial pos 23-AUG-11
id ------ utc
N 40 51.01 14:49:45
W 074 03.65
nav database expires
26-AUG-11
¬ACCEPT fmc ver 1000.5
POS KTUS 1/ 1
tucson intl
NAV N 32 06.97
ARPT W 110 56.46
elev 2643
mag var E 12.0
¬ACCEPT
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA
¬PILOT DATA
UNILINK®
¬DISK
MAINT®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 430
23-20-06 15 December 2011
6. UNILINK menu.
FANS-Enabled FANS-Disabled
• If FANS is enabled, the top menu line
displays UNILINK MENU. After the
UniLink is configured, a different set of
configuration options may be displayed
than in the FANS-Disabled menu.
• If FANS is disabled, the top menu line
displays UNILINK MENU 1/2. Press the
NEXT key to access UNILINK MENU
2/2.
• Additional options may appear at LSK
[1L], LSK [3L], LSK [2R], and LSK
[3R] depending which choices were
made during configuration.
FANS-Enabled FANS-Disabled
NOTE: The NOCOMM option may display at LSK [5R] for either a FANS-enabled or
FANS-disabled UniLink. This option also displays as SAT NOCOMM,
TEL NOCOMM, or VHF NOCOMM, depending on which communications link
UniLink has lost.
7. UNILINK 2/2 menu for FANS-Disabled.
FANS-Disabled
8. Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on either the FANS-enabled or FANS-disabled
menu.
UNILINK MENU
¬FLIGHT INFO OPS®
¬ATC
¬COMM STATUS
flight no.
¬MAINTENANCE ----
¡¢z
¬NOCOMM RETURN®
UNILINK MENU 1/2
TEXT WX®
¬FREE-TEXT
¬COMM STATUS MSG LOGS®
¡¢z
RETURN®
UNILINK MENU 2/2
¬DELAY
¬DIVERSION SITUATION®
¬ETA UPDATE POS REPORT®
¬MAINTENANCE
¡¢z
RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 431
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Use the completed worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheets section, and enter that
information into UniLink. Work through all the UniLink menus and make any necessary
modifications for the configuration.
The steps should be performed in the order indicated by the large number in the corner of the
text box.
Some of the items configured are limited to a small number of options that are selectable by
pressing a line select key (LSK). The options appear one at a time in a set sequence and are
included in the text of the step.
Other items that may be configured are limited to more than a few options. These items are
selected by typing the number of the option as presented in a numbered list.
For those items that have many possible configurations, make an entry in a fill-in field. For
example, the ICAO has assigned hundreds of aircraft type designators. These type
designators consist of not more than four characters. On the Aircraft Configuration page the
aircraft type field allows entry of up to four characters.
If an entry field is not highlighted, press the corresponding line select key to move the cursor
highlight to the field.
B. FANS Block Data Transmission
FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later is capable of transmitting FANS-specific data to support
the UniLink FANS functions. In order to enable the transmission of the FMS FANS-specific
data, ensure the FMS is configured to transmit over the UNS HS429-1 Bus.
1. Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
2. Press the PREV key to display the DATA 4/4 page.
3. Press DATE to highlight the date.
4. Enter 456789 and then press the ENTER key. The date will revert to the actual initialized
date.
5. Press the NEXT key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
6. Press MAINT to display the MAINT 1/1 page.
7. Press CONFIG to display the CONFIG 1/2 page. The EDIT prompt at LSK [1R] is not
normally displayed, but is displayed now because the configuration has been unlocked by
entering the code on the DATA 4/4 page.
8. Press EDIT to replace EDIT with STORE and allow FMS configuration settings to be
changed.
9. Press FMS CONFIG. Access the FMS CONFIG 2/4 page.
10. Press CMU. Enable FANS block data transmission.
11. Press STORE twice to restart the FMS.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 432
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. Storing UniLink Options
When all new or modified UniLink options have been entered, the installer can review the
configuration by pressing the REVIEW LSK [4R] on the UniLink SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
This provides easy access to review and confirm any configuration warning from the
UniLink.
If all modifications are acceptable, press the STORE LSK [1R]. Wait a few seconds and
press the STORE LSK again. This stores the entered information, and verifies that required
dependencies and consistency exist between the Configuration Data and the software, and
also among the Configuration Data items. UniLink will initialize and the FMS will display
the following message:
UNILINK, LSK [5L], displays in small capitals. Once the UniLink has rebooted and is ready
to process additional information, the word UNILINK redisplays in large capital letters.
Pressing the UNILINK LSK [5L] returns the FMS to the UNILINK MENU.
UNILINK/FMS
COMM ERROR
RESELECT UNILINK
¬UNILINK
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 433
23-20-06 15 December 2011
D. Configuration Edit Mode
The Configuration Worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheet section, should have
been completed. These worksheets contain the options needed to configure UniLink. Have
these worksheets available when implementing the following procedures.
(1) Selecting the UniLink Display Page
1On the FMS, press [DATA]
to display the DATA 1/4 page.
2Press UNILINK [3R]
to display the UNILINK
MENU page.
DATA 1/4
¬NAV DATA
¬PILOT DATA
UNILINK®
¬DISK
MAINT®
MAINTENANCE 1/3
¬DEVICE STATUS CONFIG®
¬SENSOR STATUS TESTS®
¬VERSIONS POWER LOG®
¬ERROR LOG
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
4Press CONFIG [1R] to
display the SYS CONFIG
1/4 page.
UNILINK MENU
¬FLIGHT INFO OPS®
¬ATC
¬COMM STATUS
flight no.
¬MAINTENANCE ----
¡¢z
¬NOCOMM RETURN®
3Press MAINTENANCE [4L]
to display the
MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 434
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Edit/Store Mode
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG EDIT®
¬VHF CONFIG TELEPHONE®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
NOTE: The FMS must be in an On
Ground condition while you
configure the UniLink. The data
entry field at [1R] will not be
accessible if the UniLink detects
a Weight Off Wheels condition.
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG -----®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
2
Push EDIT [1R]. The word EDIT is
replaced with the word STORE. Do not
push STORE [1R] again until the
configuration is complete.
NOTE: Even though the LSK displays
STORE, EDIT mode is active.
1
Push LSK [1R] to highlight
the data entry field. Type in
the password 456789 and push
ENTER. The password will be
replaced with the word EDIT
and EDIT mode is enabled.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 435
23-20-06 15 December 2011
E. Aircraft Configuration
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled STORE®
met data
disabled AIRCRAFT®
flight no.
disabled CLEARANCES®
oooi data
disabled ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
1Press the NEXT key on the
FMS to display the SYS
CONFIG 2/4 page.
3Press AIRCRAFT [2R]
to display the
AIRCRAFT page.
2Press LSK [1L] thru [4L]
and select the ENABLED
or DISABLED option for
each item.
AIRCRAFT
type
---- STORE®
registration icao addr
------- --------
º
airline id
--/---
fin number
---
--:--z
5Repeat Step 4 on LSKs
[2L], [3L], and [4L]
respectively for
REGISTRATION, AIRLINE ID,
and FIN NUMBER. Press
[2R] to highlight the
ICAO ADDR field. Enter
the ICAO ADDR and press
ENTER.
6Press RETURN [5R] to return
to the SYSTEM CONFIG 2/4
page.
4Press [1L] to highlight
the TYPE data entry
field. Enter the Type
and press ENTER.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 436
23-20-06 15 December 2011
F. Clearances
1Press CLEARANCES [3R]
to display the
CLEARANCES page.
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled STORE®
met data
disabled AIRCRAFT®
flight no
disabled CLEARANCES®
oooi data
disabled ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
2Press LSK [2L] and
select the ENABLED or
DISABLED option for
each item. Repeat for
LSK [3L].
3Press LSK [2R] and
select the ENABLED
or DISABLED option
for each item.
Repeat for LSK [3R].
CLEARANCES
STORE®
oceanic departure
disabled disabled
pushback exp taxi
disabled disabled
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
4Press RETURN [5R] to return
to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 437
23-20-06 15 December 2011
G. Alerts
SYS CONFIG 2/4
media advis
enabled STORE®
met data
disabled AIRCRAFT®
flight no
disabled CLEARANCES®
oooi times
disabled ALERTS®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
Push ALERTS [4R] to
display the ALERTS page.
1
Push RETURN [5R] to return
to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page.
4
ALERTS
new msg disc
duration: STORE®
alert¡ alert inhib alt
¡ººms ¡ººms {¡ººººft
chime¡ chime alt type
¡ººms ¡ººms baro
inhib on gnd after off
}ºkts min
--:--z
RETURN®
2
Push LSK [2L] to highlight
the data entry field.
Enter a value for ALERT1.
Push ENTER to move the
cursor to the ALERT2 field.
Continuing to push the ENTER
key moves the cursor to the
CHIME1, CHIME2, INHIB ON GND,
INHIB ALT, and AFTER OFF
fields. Values may be entered
in these fields or left as the
default if no value is
entered.
3
A value for ALT TYPE can
only be entered by pushing
LSK [4R] and then entering
a value.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 438
23-20-06 15 December 2011
H. System Configuration 3/4
1
Push NEXT on the FMS
keypad to display the
SYS CONFIG 3/4 page.
SYS CONFIG 3/4
fans
enabled STORE®
fans aural fans latency
ºms ºsec
delay msg tx supp addr
ºmin -------
ground delay
ºmin
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
2
Push LSK [1L] to toggle
enabled/disabled in the FANS field.
Push ENTER to move the cursor to
the FANS AURAL field. Push LSK [2L]
and enter a value. Continuing to
push the ENTER key moves the cursor
to the DELAY MSG TX, GROUND DELAY,
FANS LATENCY, and SUPP ADDR fields.
Values may be entered in these
fields or left as the default if
no value is entered.
NOTE: Pushing ENTER cycles through
all fields except the FANS field.
LSK [1L] must be pushed in order
to enter a value in the FANS field.
3
Push NEXT twice to return to
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 439
23-20-06 15 December 2011
I. I/O Configuration
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
1Press I/O CONFIG [1L] to
display the I/O CONFIG page.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 440
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(1) Discrete In
DISC IN 1/4
STORE®
disc in ¡ active state
not used ground
disc in  active state
not used ground
disc in £ active state
not used ground
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1
Press DISCRETE IN [1L] to
display the DISC IN 1/4
page.
5
Press NEXT to display the next DISC IN
page and repeat steps 2, 3 and 4
until all 10 discrete inputs are set.
Press RETURN [5R].
2
Press LSK [2L] to configure
DISC IN 1. The DISC IN OPT 1/2
page displays with a list
of all available options.
DISC IN OPT 1/2
select
¡ not used #-
 brake set
£ strut comp
¢ test
 door ¡ closed
§ door  closed
¶ door £ closed
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
3
Enter the number of the
desired option and press
ENTER. The DISC IN 1/4
page displays.
4
Press LSK [2R] and toggle the active
state of the DISC IN 1 between
GROUND and OPEN.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
NOTE: Press the NEXT or PREV key to
toggle between DISC IN OPT pages 1
and 2.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 441
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(2) Discrete Out
DISC OUT 1/5
STORE®
disc out ¡ active state
not used ground
disc out active state
not used ground
disc out £ active state
not used ground
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1Press DISCRETE OUT
[2L] to display the
DISC OUT 1/5 page.
5Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all
14 discrete outputs are set and then
press RETURN [5R].
2Press LSK [2L] to configure
DISC OUT 1. The DISC OUT OPT
1/2 page displays with a list
of all available options.
DISC OUT OPT 1/2
select
¡ not used #-
 vox annun
£ new msg ¡
¢ new msg 
 vhf nocomm
§ sat nocomm
¶ tel nocomm
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
3Enter the number of the
desired option and press
ENTER. For more options,
press NEXT to display the
the DISC OUT OPT 2/2 page.
4
Press LSK [2R] and toggle the
active state of the DISC OUT 1
between GROUND and OPEN.
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
º§z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
DISC OUT OPT 2/2
select
¡ vdr box sel #-
 chime ¡
£ chime 
¢ fans visual
 fans aural
§ cpdlc cnect
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 442
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(3) ARINC Receive
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1
Press ARINC RECEIVE [3L]
to display the ARINC RX
1/3 page.
5
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all
16 ARINC RX ports are set and
then push RETURN [5R].
3
Enter the number of the desired
option for port 1 and press ENTER.
This automatically returns you to
the ARINC RX 1/3 page. Select
another port to configure. The
ARINC RX OPT 1/4 page displays.
2
Press LSK [2L] to configure
PORT 1. The ARINC RX OPT page
displays with a list of the
available options for Port 1.
NOTE: Choosing Ports 2 - 16
displays one of ARINC RX
OPT 1/4 pages.
ARINC RX 1/3
STORE®
port ¡ port ¢
fms/cdu¡ not used
port  port 
¶¢¡ sdu not used
port £ port §
not used not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
ARINC RX OPT 1/4
select
¡ not used #-
 fms/cdu
£ fms/cdu£
¢ ¶¢º print
 ¶¢¡ sdu
§ vm cmc
¶ §º¢ cmc
--:--z
RETURN®
ARINC RX OPT
select
¡ fms/cdu¡ #-
 fms/cdu
£ fms/cdu£
¢ mcdu¡
 mcdu
§ mcdu£
ARINC RX OPT 3/4
select
¡ ¶º fms£ #-
 ¶¢£a gnss
£ ¶º vdr
¢ test
 adc¡
§ adc
¶ generic¡
--:--z
RETURN®
ARINC RX OPT 2/4
select
¡ dhc iop¡ #-
 dhc iop
£ mcdu¡
¢ mcdu
 mcdu£
§ ¶º fms¡
¶ ¶º fms
--:--z
RETURN®
4
After configuring all the ports
on the chosen ARINC RX OPT page,
press NEXT to go to the next ARINC
RX OPT page.
ARINC RX OPT 4/4
select
¡ generic #-
 generic£
£ generic¢
--:--z
RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 443
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(4) ARINC Transmit
ARINC TX 1/3
STORE®
port ¡ speed devices
low PORT 1®
port  speed
low PORT 2®
port £ speed
low PORT 3®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1Press ARINC TRANSMIT [4L]
to display the ARINC TX 1/3
page.
4Press LSK [1L] and <*>
appears to indicate that the
item is selected. Press the
LSK again and <*> disappears.
Repeat for each device.
2PORT 1 SPEED defaults to LOW.
Press PORT 2 SPEED [3L] and
select the LOW or HIGH
speed option. Repeat
for the rest of the ARINC
TX ports. Ports 4 - 8 are
on ARINC TX pages 2 and 3.
ARINC TX OPT 1/3
port ¡
¬FMS/CDU1<*> 741 SDU®
¬FMS/CDU2 VOX TUNE®
¬FMS/CDU3 VM CMC®
¬740 PRINT 604 CMC®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
NOTE: Multiple port devices
can be configured on
a single port but no
device may be configured
so that it resides
on more than one port.
3Press PORT 1 [2R] to display the
ARINC TX OPT 1/3 page. A list of
devices available for each of the
ARINC TX ports displays.
5Press NEXT to display ARINC
TX 2/3 and follow the procedure
in step 4. Press NEXT again to display
ARINC TX 3/3. Once all ARINC TX ports
are configured, press RETURN twice to
return to the I/O CONFIG page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 444
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(5) Serial Port Configuration
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
SERIAL 1/2
port ¡
not used STORE®
port 
not used
port £
not used
port ¢
not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1Press SERIAL [1R] to
display the SERIAL 1/2
page.
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each of the
six serial ports.
Once all serial ports are configured,
press RETURN to display the I/O CONFIG
page.
2Press PORT 1 [1L] to
display the SERIAL OPT 1/2
page.
SERIAL OPT 1/2
select
¡ not used #-
 lo-res display
£ aero-m
¢ printer
 vhr gnd sim
§ sat gnd sim
¶ iridium
--:--z
RETURN®
3Type the number of the desired
option and press ENTER. This
returns you to the SERIAL 1/2 page.
For more options, press NEXT to
display the SERIAL OPT 2/2 page.
SERIAL OPT 2/2
select
¡ hi-res display ¡ #-
 hi-res display 
£ tel sim
--:--z
RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 445
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(6) Graphics
I/O CONFIG
¬DISCRETE IN SERIAL®
¬DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS®
¬ARINC RECEIVE
¬ARINC TRANSMIT
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1
Press GRAPHICS [2R] to
display the GRAPHICS page.
GRAPHICS
cdu/mfd baud rate
¡ª.kbps STORE®
cdu¡ graphics disp on
-
cdu graphics disp on
-
cdu£ graphics disp on
-
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
5
When all CDU graphics displays are configured, press RETURN twice to return to the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
3
Press LSK [2L] to display and select
the graphics configuration for CDU1.
CDU# GRAPHICS
¬CDU<*> HR1®
¬RCDU HR2®
¬MFD-LR
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
4
Graphics options are CDU, RCDU,
MFD-LR, HR1, and HR2. An <*> appears
to indicate that the item is selected.
Press the LSK again and <*> disappears.
All or none of the options may be
chosen.
Press RETURN to return to the
GRAPHICS page.
2
Press CDU/MFD BAUD RATE [1L]
to toggle between 9600BPS and
19.2KBPS.
6
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for CDU2 and CDU3.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 446
23-20-06 15 December 2011
J. VHF Configuration
VHF CONFIG 1/2
radio type
INTERNAL VDR STORE®
contact timer arinc
ENABLED DISABLED
tracker timer sita
ENABLED DISABLED
preferred dsp avicom
NONE DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
1
Push VHF CONFIG [2L]
to display the VHF
CONFIG 1/2 page.
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU REVIEW®
2
Push RADIO TYPE [1L] to cycle
through the RADIO TYPE options.
Push all other configuration
options to cycle through and
choose the options.
VHF CONFIG 2/2
enabled mode(s)
POA/AOA STORE®
minimum sqp
4
sqp threshold
12
voice freq control
DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
4
Push ENABLED MODE(S) [1L] to
cycle through the ENABLED
MODE(S) options. Push all other
configuration options to cycle
through and choose the options.
3Push NEXT to display the VHF
CONFIG 2/2 page.
5Push RETURN to display the SYS
CONFIG 1/4 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 447
23-20-06 15 December 2011
K. Satellite (SAT) Configuration
1
Press SAT CONFIG [3L]
to display the SAT
CONFIG page.
2
Press TRACKER TIMER
[1L] and select ENABLED
or DISABLED. Press AUTO
RETURN [2L] and select
ENABLED or DISABLED.
3
Press RETURN [5R] to the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
SAT CONFIG
tracker timer
ENABLED STORE®
auto return
ENABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 448
23-20-06 15 December 2011
L. Priority Configuration
1
Press PRIORITY [4L] to
display the COMM
PRIORITY page.
2
Press 1ST [2L] to cycle
through the NORMAL options.
Based on which option is
chosen, not all options
will be seen for each
choice. Repeat for 2ND [3L]
and 3RD [4L].
COMM PRIORITY
STORE®
normal alternate
¬¡st sat none ¡st®
¬nd none none nd®
¬£rd none none £rd®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
3
Press 1ST [2R] to cycle
through the ALTERNATE
options. Based on which
option is chosen, not all
options will be seen for
each choice. Repeat for 2ND
[3R] and 3RD [4R].
4
Press RETURN [5R] to show the
SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 449
23-20-06 15 December 2011
M. Telephony (TEL) Configuration
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
1
Press TEL CONFIG [2R] to
display the TEL CONFIG 1/2
page.
5
Press
NEXT to display the
TEL CONFIG 2/2 page.
Press
REDIAL PAUSE [1L] and
enter a pause of 5 to 60
seconds.
Press
DIAL ATTEMPTS [2L] and
enter a number of dial attempts
of 1 to 6.
Press
AUTO-DELAY [3L] and
enter a delay of 1 to 9 minutes.
2
Press AIR PHONE [1L] to
select the option for
telephony communications.
3
Press
ACCESS NUMBER [2L] and
enter up to 19 alphanumeric
characters for the primary
telephone access number.
Press
ENTER when completed.
NOTE: Contact your DSP to
obtain the correct access
number.
4
Press WX MAPS [3L] to toggle the ENABLED
or DISABLED option for each. Repeat for
SUSP MSG [4L].
NOTE: If IRIDIUM is chosen as the AIR
PHONE option, WX MAPS, in the window
above, displays a BAUD RATE option that
can be selected at LSK [3R].
TEL CONFIG 1/2
air phone
IRIDIUM STORE®
access number
-------------------
wx maps
DISABLED BAUD RATE
¢ººbps
susp msg
ENABLED
--:--z
6
Press RETURN [5R] to display
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page.
TEL CONFIG 2/2
redial pause
£ºsec STORE®
dial attempts
§
auto-delay
min
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 450
23-20-06 15 December 2011
N. Position Report Configuration
1
Press POS REPORT [3R]
to display the POS
REPORT page.
2
Press AUTOMATIC
REPORTING: IN AIR
[2L] and select
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
3
Press ON GROUND [3L]
and and select
ENABLED OR DISABLED.
POS REPORT
automatic
reporting: STORE®
in air air intv
ENABLED 15MINS
on ground ground intv
DISABLED 60MINS
in air default
DISABLED
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
4
Press IN AIR DEFAULT [4L]
and select ENABLED OR
DISABLED.
5
Press AIR INTV [2R] and
enter the number of
minutes.
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
7
Press RETURN [5R] to display
the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page and
perform the Configuration
Review.
6
Press GROUND INTV [3R]
and enter the number of
minutes.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 451
23-20-06 15 December 2011
O. Configuration Review
1
Press REVIEW [4R] to
display the REVIEW 1/22
page.
REVIEW 1/22
discrete in:
disc in, active state
º¡:not used , ground
º:not used , ground
¬PRINT SEND®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
SYS CONFIG 1/4
¬I/O CONFIG STORE®
¬VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG®
¬SAT CONFIG POS REPORT®
¬PRIORITY REVIEW®
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU
NOTE: The REVIEW pages are a visual representation of the contents of the
UniLink Configuration Module. After reviewing all pages for errors, press
NEXT on the keypad to return to the REVIEW Page 1. If the
configuration is correct, press RETURN LSK [5R] to display SYS CONFIG 1/4.
Press STORE [1R] twice to save the configuration. If errors were noted during the
review, it will be necessary to return to the appropriate configuration page
to make the changes.
REVIEW 2/22
º£:not used , ground
º¢:not used , ground
º:not used , ground
º§:not used , ground
º¶:not used , ground
º:not used , ground
ºª:not used , ground
¡º:not used , ground
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
3
Press NEXT to display the each
sequential review page.
2
Press SEND [4R] to transmit a
Configuration Report downlink.
NOTE: When SEND is pressed, the
QUEUED message displays over the
SEND LSK.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 452
23-20-06 15 December 2011
REVIEW 3/22
discrete out:
disc out
,
active state
º¡:not used
,
ground
º:not used
,
ground
º£:not used
,
ground
º¢:not used
,
ground
º:not used
,
ground
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 4/22
º§:not used
,
ground
º¶:not used
,
ground
º:not used
,
ground
ºª:not used
,
ground
¡º:not used
,
ground
¡¡:not used
,
ground
¡:not used
,
ground
¡£:not used
,
ground
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 5/22
¡¢:not used
,
ground
arinc rx:
rx port º¡:fms/cdu¡
rx port º:not used
rx port º£:not used
rx port º¢:not used
rx port º:not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 6/22
rx port º§:not used
rx port º¶:not used
rx port º:not used
rx port ºª:not used
rx port ¡º:not used
rx port ¡¡:not used
rx port ¡:not used
rx port ¡£:not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 7/22
rx port ¡¢:not used
rx port ¡:not used
rx port ¡§:not used
arinc tx:
tx port º¡:fms/cdu¡
speed:low
tx port º:--------
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 8/22
speed:low
tx port º£:--------
speed:low
tx port º¢:--------
speed:low
tx port º:--------
speed:low
tx port º§:--------
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 9/22
speed:low
tx port º¶:--------
speed:low
tx port º:--------
speed:low
serial:
port ¡: not used
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 10/22
port : not used
port £: not used
port ¢: not used
port : not used
port §: not used
graphics:
cdu/mfd baud:¡ª.kbps
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 11/22
cdu¡:-----------
cdu:-----------
cdu£:-----------
vhf config:
radio:none
contact timer:enabled
tracker timer:enabled
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 12/22
preferred dsp:none
arinc:disabled
sita:disabled
avicom:disabled
enabled mode:poa/aoa
minimum sqp:¢
sqp threshold:¡
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 453
23-20-06 15 December 2011
REVIEW 13/22
voice freq ctrl:
disabled
sat config:
tracker timer:disabled
auto return:disabled
comm priority:
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 14/22
normal ¡st:vhf
normal nd:none
normal £rd:none
alternate ¡st:none
alternate nd:none
alternate £rd:none
tel config:
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 15/22
air phone:none
access number:
--------------------
wx maps:disabled
susp msg:enabled
baud rate:¢ººbps
redial pause:£ºsec
dial attempts:§
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 16/22
auto-delay:min
pos report:
in air:enabled
on ground:disabled
in air default:disabled
air intv:¡min
ground intv:§ºmin
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 17/22
sys config ÷¢:
media advis:enabled
met data:disabled
flight no.:disabled
oooi data:disabled
aircraft:
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 18/22
type:----
registration:-------
airline id:--÷---
fin number:---
icao addr:--------
clearances:
oceanic:disabled
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 19/22
pushback:disabled
departure:disabled
exp taxi:disabled
alerts:
alert¡:ººººms
alert:ººººms
chime¡:ººººms
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 20/22
chime:ººººms
inhib on gnd:ººkts
inhib alt:¡ººººft
alt type:baro
after off:ºmin
sys config £÷¢:
fans:enabled
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 21/22
fans aural:ºms
delay msg tx:ººmin
ground delay:ººmin
fans latency:ºsec
supp addr:-------
sys config ¢÷¢:
config mod updates:
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
REVIEW 22/22
date time
§-aug-¡¡ ¡¶ºz
§-aug-¡¡ ¡¶ºz
§-aug-¡¡ ¡¶ºz
--:--z
¬UNILINK MENU RETURN®
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 501
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting
1. UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures
A. Post Installation Test
For instructions on testing the UniLink following the initial installation in an aircraft, the
installer should refer to the installation Ground and/or Flight Test Plans that are part of the
UniLink installation (TC, STC, Field Approval) certification package.
The installation approval applicant should contact Universal Avionics Certification
Department for Ground and/or Flight Test Plan templates that can be used for developing
customized test plans.
B. Return to Service
The following defines the conditions under which tests, specified below, should be
conducted.
(1) Safety Precautions
User should follow all appropriate safety precautions.
(2) Power Input
Unless otherwise specified, tests should be conducted with the equipment powered by
the aircraft’s electrical power generating system.
(3) Associated Equipment or Systems
Unless otherwise specified, turn on all aircraft electrically operated equipment and
systems before conducting these tests.
(4) Environment
During tests, the equipment should not be subjected to environmental conditions that
exceed those specified by the equipment manufacturer.
(5) Warm-up Period
No warm-up period is required. However, some time must be allowed for all
associated equipment to boot up properly and stabilize.
C. UniLink to FMS/CDU Communications
NOTE: This procedure should be completed for each FMS/CDU connected to the
UniLink.
(1) Verify that DATA 1/4 page is displayed an active UNILINK prompt.
(2) From the DATA 1/4 page, press the UNILINK LSK [3R] and verify the UNILINK
MENU 1/2 page is displayed.
(3) Press RETURN LSK [5R]. Verify that the DATA 1/4 page is displayed.
(4) Repeat test steps 1 through 3 for each FMS/CDU connected and configured for
UniLink.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 502
23-20-06 15 December 2011
D. Version Check
(1) From the UNILINK MENU Page 1, press NEXT.
(2) Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L].
(3) Press VERSIONS LSK [3L].
(4) Verify the correct UniLink SCN and Part Number appears on the screen.
E. Device Status
(1) Ensure all peripheral devices are powered on.
(2) Press the DEVICE STATUS LSK [1L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
(3) Verify that the device status is OK for all applicable configured peripheral devices
such as FMSs, MCDUs, CDUs, low and high resolution graphics devices, and CVRs.
Press NEXT to cycle thru the DEVICES pages.
F. UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications
This procedure applies only to display devices wired and configured to support weather
graphics.
(1) From the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page, press the TESTS LSK [2R].
(2) Press the IMAGE LSK [2L].
(3) The IMAGE TEST IN PROGRESS pop-up message will appear.
(4) Verify that the test image below is presented on all appropriate display devices.
NOTE: • This is a Low Resolution test image and will be displayed as such on High
Resolution display devices as well. UniLink does not generate a High
Resolution test image.
• It is recommended that you delete the test image following test completion.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 503
23-20-06 15 December 2011
G. UL-801 VHF Communications
VHF datalink service coverage on the ground may be limited. Coverage may be affected by
ground obstacles and may be restricted due to poor line of sight of the VHF ground station
antenna.
(1) The VHF communications status is indicated on the UniLink COMM STATUS page.
Press COMM STATUS LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
(2) If VHF COMM STATUS is COMM/IDLE, a request for ATIS information can be
performed on the ground. Otherwise, if the VHF COMM STATUS is
NOCOMM/SCANNING, the aircraft should be relocated elsewhere until the status of
COMM/IDLE is obtained.
(3) To request D-ATIS, from the UNILINK MENU Page 1:
• Press the FLIGHT INFO LSK.
• Press the D-ATIS LSK.
• Press AIRPORT. Type KORD, for example, or your airport identifier.
• Press LSK [ENTER].
• Press SEND to transmit the request.
− If QUEUED is displayed above the SEND prompt, the VHF probably is not
connected to the ACARS system.
− If Sending, SENT is displayed. The request was received and acknowledged.
Your request will be shortly received by UniLink and available for viewing.
H. OOOI Sensor Test
(4) Ensure Door and Park Brake discrete inputs are connected and configured.
(1) From UNILINK MENU 2/2 page, press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L].
(2) Press SENSOR STATUS LSK [2L].
(3) Open and close the door.
(4) Verify the DOORS status changes accordingly.
(5) Release and set parking brake.
(6) Verify the BRAKE status changes accordingly.
(7) Verify the AIR/GROUND status is ON GROUND.
NOTE: If the aircraft is on jacks, the status will be IN AIR.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 504
23-20-06 15 December 2011
I. Printer Test
(1) Verify that printer power is on and has passed its self-test.
(2) With the DATA page 1/4 displayed, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK
MENU 1/2 will display.
(3) Press the NEXT key.
(4) Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
(5) Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page.
(6) Press PRINTER LSK [1L]. The printing message pop-up message will display and a
test pattern will be sent to the printer.
(7) The TESTS page will again display.
J. Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes
This procedure applies only to FANS-enabled aircraft.
(1) From the DATA 1/4 page, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK MENU 1/2
page will display.
(2) Press the NEXT key.
(3) Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
(4) Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page.
(5) Press FANS ALERTS LSK [1R]. The FANS DISCRETE TEST IN PROGRESS pop-
up message will appear.
(6) Verify that all appropriate FANS Visual and Aural alerts activate momentarily.
K. Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional)
This test simply reboots the UniLink. After the reboot process, verify that the UniLink
prompt becomes active.
L. Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based
Telephony System
NOTE: Ensure that the selected DSP supports Weather Graphics uplinks.
(1) Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page.
(2) Press UNILINK LSK [3R] to display UNILINK MENU 1/2.
(3) Press WX MAPS LSK [2R] to display the WX MAP REQUEST page.
(4) Press SIG WX LSK [2R] and the SIGNIFICANT WX page will display.
(5) Press SEND LSK [4R]. This prompts UniLink to place a call to the selected DSP.
(6) The QUEUED and SENDING messages display. After a few minutes, the FMS
UniLink will display NEW WX ADVISORY under the ADVISORY area. Press the
LSK to the left of the ADVISORY message to display the message.
a) If a UniLink page is not currently displayed on the FMS, the MSG icon light will
flash.
(7) Press the MSG key on the FMS to display the MESSAGES 1/X page. The UNILINK
WX MAP RCVD message will appear.
(8) Pressing the UniLink prompt will display the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 505
23-20-06 15 December 2011
(9) Press LSK [5L] to display the weather map. Verify that the correct map has been
received.
M. Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT)
NOTE: Ensure that the selected DSP provides this service.
(1) Verify that the SatCom SDU is powered up, initialized, and logged on.
(2) From the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page, press COMM STATUS.
(3) If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/UNAVAILABLE, UniLink has not detected label
270 from the SatCom. This indicates the Sat Link is unavailable.
(4) If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/CONNECTING, the SatCom Link is available,
UniLink will send a Link Test message, and wait for an acknowledgement from the
ACARS network to confirm connectivity to the network.
(5) If SatCom status is COMM/IDLE, the SatCom Link connectivity to the ACARS
network has been confirmed and UniLink is ready to send and receive messages via
the SatCom link.
All tests are now complete.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 506
23-20-06 15 December 2011
2. Error Messages
A complete list of defined error messages is shown in the following tables:
• The Pop-up Error Messages table shows the error conditions that result in a pop-up
window error message. These errors are deemed significant enough to warrant
immediate, detailed annunciation.
• The General Error Messages table shows the general error messages that may result in a
NEW ERROR MSG advisory alert, as well as the recommended actions for resolution.
• The Configuration Error Messages shows possible configuration error messages, as well
as the recommended actions for resolution.
• The Hidden Error/Status Messages shows unannunciated error/status messages that are
normally hidden from the error log.
A. Pop-up Window Error Messages
Pop-up Window Error Messages
Pop-up Window Text Condition
FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT
SAVED.
User attempt to STORE configuration data that does
not configure the same FMS or MCDU on RX Port 1
and TX Port 1.
FMS/VDR SHARE TX PORT. CONFIG NOT
SAVED.
User attempt to STORE configuration data with an
ARINC 429 transmit port configured to interface to both
a UASC FMS and an ARINC 750 VDR.
FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT
SAVED
User attempt to STORE configuration data with both a
UASC FMS/CDU and an MCDU configured together.
UNABLE TO WRITE TO CONFIG MODULE. User attempt to STORE configuration data with
Configuration Module error.
DISPLAY PROCESSOR FAIL A configured display processor has failed or
experienced a communication failure, or too many bad
slots have been detected.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 507
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. General Error Messages
UniLink error messages may be found by using either of the following two processes:
(1) Press the MSG key to see the messages.
a) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages.
(2) Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page.
a) Press the ERROR LOG LSK [4L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page.
NOTE: The Error Log contains all error messages including configuration
error messages. The messages found when pressing the MSG key are
only applicable to configuration errors.
b) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages.
General Error Messages
Text Action/Description
FMS1 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and FMS1. If condition persists
contact UASC.
FMS2 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and FMS2. If condition persists
contact UASC.
FMS3 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and FMS3. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CDU1 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and CDU1. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
CDU2 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and CDU2. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
CDU3 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and CDU3. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU1 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU1. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU2 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU2. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
REMOTE CDU3 DP INOP Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU3. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MFD-LR1
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD1. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 508
23-20-06 15 December 2011
General Error Messages
Text Action/Description
MFD-LR2
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD2. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
MFD-LR3
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and MFD3. If condition persists
contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a
particular device, examine connection between the
graphics display device and UniLink.
HR-1
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 1
(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact
UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular
device, examine connection between the graphics
display device and UniLink.
HR-2
INOP
Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 2
(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact
UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular
device, examine connection between the graphics
display device and UniLink.
MCDU1 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU1. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MCDU2 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU2. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
MCDU3 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU3. If condition
persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or
frequent for a particular device, examine connection
between the graphics display device and UniLink.
HF RADIO INOP Cycle power to UniLink and HF radio.
SDU INOP Cycle power to UniLink and SDU. If condition persists
contact UASC.
TEL INOP Cycle power to UniLink and telephone system. If
condition persists contact UASC.
CMC INOP Cycle power to UniLink and CMC. If condition persists
contact UASC.
A740 PRINTER INOP Cycle power to UniLink and Printer. If condition
persists contact UASC.
SERIAL PRINTER INOP No action required. Temporary condition that will
correct with next job UniLink sends to printer.
VHF VDLM2 RADIO INOP Cycle power to UniLink and radio. If condition persists
contact UASC.
THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING LOW ON NVRAM
AND SHOULD BE RESTARTED.
Cycle power to UniLink.
THE SYSTEM IS CRITICALLY SHORT OF
NVRAM. SYSTEM RESTART IS IMMINENT.
Cycle power to UniLink.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 509
23-20-06 15 December 2011
General Error Messages
Text Action/Description
SERIAL PRINTER FAILURE Examine the printer and its serial and power
connections.
PRINT JOB TOO LARGE No action required. UniLink has attempted to forward a
corrupted uplink to the printer. Re-request uplink data.
[Hardware port] FAIL
example:
ARINC TX PORT 1 FAIL
Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists contact
UASC.
THE FATAL ERROR LOG HAS BEEN
CORRUPTED
No action required. Old messages are discarded and
the log is automatically restarted.
THE FATAL ERROR LOG CONTAINS A NEW
ENTRY
No action required. If condition is frequent, contact
UASC.
PROTOCOL ERROR LOG CORRUPT.
OLD PROTOCOL ERRORS DISCARDED.
LOGGING OF PROTOCOL ERRORS WILL
RESTART.
No action required. Old messages are discarded and
protocol error logging is automatically restarted.
LINK ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
condition is frequent for a particular device, examine
connection between device and UniLink.
PROTOCOL ERROR LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
CTS BUSY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
condition is frequent for a particular device, examine
connection between device and UniLink.
CTS TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
MSG RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
SYN LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
MSG TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
DSC RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
DSC TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
SPW RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
SPW TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
TX BUF FULL LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
RX PORT 1: UASC FMS DETECTED.
OVERRIDING PORT CONFIGURATION FOR
MCDU
Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as
FMS/CDU1 and transmit port 1 as FMS/CDU1.
RX PORT 1: MCDU DETECTED. OVERRIDING
PORT CONFIGURATION FOR UASC FMS
Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as
MCDU1 and transmit port 1 as MCDU1.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 510
23-20-06 15 December 2011
General Error Messages
Text Action/Description
STATUS TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
No action required. Protocol errors are automatically
corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If
condition is frequent, examine connection between the
printer and UniLink.
ENQ TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
RECORD TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
RECORD RESEND LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
PRINTER FAIL LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
DOOR OPEN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
TEST LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
INIT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
OVERRUN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
BUSY LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
INVALID CTS LSK [count, first/last occurrence]
ERASE FAULT LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device,
examine connection between the graphics display
device and UniLink.
TOO MANY FAILED SLOTS LSK [device name,
count, first/last occurrence]
UNEXPECTED EOF LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
UNKNOWN IMAGE FORMAT LSK [device
name, count, first/last occurrence]
GIF ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last
occurrence]
TRANSMIT FAIL LSK [device name, count,
first/last occurrence]
INVALID GX HEADER LSK [count, first/last
occurrence]
If condition is recent or frequent, examine connection
between telephone system and UniLink.
VDL MODE A NOT SUPPORTED Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDL MODE 2 NOT SUPPORTED Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR TX WARN FAULT Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR STATUS FAULT Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
CTRL PROTOCOL CMU ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
CTRL PROTOCOL VDR ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ACARSIP CMU ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 511
23-20-06 15 December 2011
General Error Messages
Text Action/Description
ACARSIP VDR ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ASIP CMU ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
ASIP VDR ERROR Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
replace VDR or contact UASC.
VDR SOFTWARE LOAD FAULT Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists,
contact UASC.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 512
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. Configuration Error Messages
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR--UNABLE TO
LOAD CONFIGURATION MODULE.
Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
contact UASC.
ERROR READING CONFIGURATION
MODULE FROM NON-VOLATILE MEMORY.
Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CONFIGURATION MODULE CRC CODE
FAILURE.
Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists
contact UASC.
CONFIGURATION MODULE VERSION
INCOMPATIBLE WITH SOFTWARE--
CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED.
Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and
store the configuration.
CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION
OLDER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION--
CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED.
Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and
store the configuration.
AN ADC AND AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE
CONFIGURED TOGETHER
An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with a
DADC. Configure UniLink accordingly.
CONFIGURATION UPDATED FROM OLDER
FORMAT. SOME DEFAULT VALUES USED.
CONFIGURATION SHOULD BE VERIFIED
AND RESAVED.
Once the configuration has been stored this message
will not appear. A newer configuration revision should
be used.
CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION
NEWER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION--
EXTRA DATA IGNORED.
Once the configuration has been stored this message
will not appear.
ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A
TRANSMIT PORT BUT NO RECEIVE PORT.
Configure UniLink with a receive port for each
configured transmit port listed on the ARINC
TRANSMIT page.
ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A
RECEIVE PORT BUT NO TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure UniLink with a transmit port for each
configured receive port listed on the ARINC RECEIVE
page.
THE SAME DEVICE IS ASSIGNED TO MORE
THAN ONE ARINC 429 TRANSMIT PORT.
Any given device cannot be configured on more than
one transmit port; configure UniLink accordingly.
AN A702 FMS OR GENERIC DEVICE IS
CONFIGURED BUT LACKS A DEFINITION IN
THE CUSTOMER DATABASE.
Load UniLink with a customer database that supports
an ARINC 702 FMS or generic device, as appropriate.
MULTIPLE CMC DEVICES CONFIGURED. Configure UniLink with either no CMC or a single
CMC, as appropriate, because UniLink cannot be
configured with multiple CMC devices.
THE UASC FMS THE ARINC 702 FMS AND
THE GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT BE
CONFIGURED TOGETHER.
Configure UniLink with the same navigation source
only (i.e., the UASC FMS(s), the ARINC 702 FMS(s),
or the GNSS receiver) because UniLink cannot be
configured with dissimilar navigation sources
concurrently.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 513
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
AN ADC AND A GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT
BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER
Configure UniLink with DADC device(s) or GNSS
receiver. DADC and GNSS are dissimilar altitude
sources and cannot be configured concurrently,
configure UniLink accordingly.
AN ADC AND AN ARINC 702 FMS MAY NOT
BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER
A digital air data computer cannot be configured
concurrently with an ARINC 702 FMS, configure
UniLink accordingly.
AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED
TOGETHER WITH AN ARINC 702 FMS OR
THE GNSS RECEIVER.
An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with an
ARINC 702 FMS or with a GNSS receiver; configure
UniLink accordingly.
AN MCDU IS CONFIGURED BUT AN ARINC
702 FMS OR GNSS RECEIVER IS NOT
CONFIGURED.
When an MCDU is configured, configure UniLink with
an ARINC 702 FMS or a GNSS receiver.
IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO
DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS AT LEAST ONE
DISPLAY MUST BE SET TO MFD-LR OR HR-1
OR HR-2
If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC
739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution
MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R.
(See 0 and 2.)
IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO
DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS NO DISPLAY MAY
BE SET TO CDU OR RCDU.
If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC
739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution
MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R.
Ensure no MCDU, wired as an ARINC 739A MCDU, is
configured as a CDU. (See 0 and 2).
MORE THAN TWO REMOTE CDU GRAPHIC
DEVICES CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink with no more than two RCDU
displays.
REMOTE CDU-1 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-1 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
REMOTE CDU-2 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-2 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
REMOTE CDU-3 CONFIGURED WITHOUT
PRIMARY CDU-3 CONFIGURED.
When configuring a remote CDU for graphics,
configure both the RCDU and the corresponding
primary CDU.
NO MORE THAN FOUR DISPLAY
PROCESSORS MAY BE CONFIGURED ON
THE LOW-RES DISPLAY PORT
Configure UniLink with four or fewer graphic devices
on the low-resolution display serial port.
ARINC TEST DEVICE CONFIGURED. Remove the TEST DEV selection from any ARINC
RECEIVE port; it is used for test purposes only.
A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO
VALID AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS
CONFIGURED.
When an A750 VDR is configured, configure UniLink
with a valid aircraft registration in the REGISTRATION
field on the A/C CONFIG page.
A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO
VALID AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT.
Configure UniLink with a valid airline/agency identifier
in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on the A/C
CONFIG page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 514
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID
AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft
registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C
CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and receive
ports for an SDU.
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID
AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT.
Configure UniLink either with a valid airline/agency
identifier in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on
the A/C CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU.
AN AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED
BUT NO VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS
PRESENT.
Configure UniLink either with a valid telephone number
in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page or do not configure UniLink for an
air phone (NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page).
A VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS PRESENT
BUT NO AIR PHONE DEVICE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
device in the AIR PHONE field or with no telephone
number in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the
TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
VHF APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA PRIORITY
SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in
the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page
or without VHF in any of the three NORMAL fields on
the COMM PRIORITY page.
VHF APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in
the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page
or without VHF in any of the three ALTERNATE fields
on the COMM PRIORITY page.
SATCOM APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU or without SAT in any of the
three NORMAL fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
SATCOM APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink's ARINC transmit and receive ports
for an SDU or configure UniLink with no SAT in any of
the three ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY
page.
TELEPHONY APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA
PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR PHONE
DEVICE IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG
1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three NORMAL
fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
TELEPHONY APPEARS IN ALTERNATE
MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR
PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone
device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG
1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three
ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page.
VHF IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN EITHER
MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
Configure UniLink either with VHF in the desired
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the RADIO
TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 515
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN
EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
Configure UniLink either with SAT in the desired
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with no ARINC transmit
and receive ports for an SDU.
TELEPHONY IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN
EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST.
Configure UniLink either with TEL in the desired
priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the
COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
THE VHF SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
Remove the VHF GND SIM selection on the SERIAL
setup pages; it is used for test purposes only.
THE SATCOM SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
Remove the SAT GND SIM selection on the SERIAL
setup pages; it is used for test purposes only.
THE TELEPHONY SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR
DEVELOPMENT ONLY.
Remove the TEL SIM selection on the SERIAL setup
pages; it is used for test purposes only.
A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO IRIDIUM
BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with IRIDIUM in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no
serial port as IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages.
THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS
/IRIDIUM BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL
PORT IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as
IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO AERO M
BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with T-T Aero-M in the AIR
PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no
serial port as Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages.
THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS
A
ERO M BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT
IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as
Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT
FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO
ALTITUDE BUT NO IOP BUS IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with DHC8 IOPn in the
correct PORT n field on the ARINC RECEIVE pages
or with BARO in the ALT TYPE field on the ALERT
CONFIG page.
THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT
FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO
ALTITUDE BUT THE CONFIGURED ALTITUDE
THRESHOLD VALUE IS TOO LARGE.
Configure UniLink either with a value equal to or less
than 2500 in the INHIB ALT field or with BARO in the
ALT TYPE field on the ALERT CONFIG page.
THE VHF VOX-ANNUN OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2
page or with no DISC OUT n field as VOX ANNUN on
the DISC OUT pages.
THE VDR MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE
IS CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2
page or with no DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL
on the DISC OUT pages.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 516
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
THE VHF-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO VHF RADIO IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct radio in the
RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or
with no DISC OUT n field as VHF NOCOMM on the
DISC OUT pages.
THE SAT-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO SDU IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for an SDU or with no DISC OUT n field
as SAT NOCOMM on the DISC OUT pages.
THE TEL-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO TELEPHONE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in
the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or
with no DISC OUT n field as TEL NOCOMM on the
DISC OUT pages.
ARINC IS CONFIGURED BUT OOOI IS
DISABLED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the OOOI
TIMES field on the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page or with
OFF in the ARINC field on the DSP SETUP page.
AN ARINC VOICE TUNE BUS TRANSMIT
PORT IS CONFIGURED BUT NO A750 VDR IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or
with no ARINC transmit port with device VOICE TUNE
BUS.
AN ARINC TRANSMIT PORT IS CONFIGURED
FOR BOTH VOX TUNE AND SOME OTHER
FUNCTION. THE VOX TUNE PORT CANNOT
BE SHARED.
The VOX TUNE bus cannot be configured
concurrently with another device; configure UniLink
accordingly.
THE SETTINGS FOR VOICE FREQUENCY
TUNING, THE VOICE TUNE BUS, AND THE
VHF MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE ARE
INCONSISTENT WITH ONE ANOTHER.
Configure UniLink either with:
The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF
CONFIG page set to ENABLE 25 or ENABLE 8.33/25,
AND an ARINC transmit port with device VOICE
TUNE BUS, AND a DISC OUT n field configured as
VDR VOX SEL.
OR
The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF
CONFIG page set to DISABLE, AND no ARINC
transmit port with device VOICE TUNE BUS, AND no
DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL.
VHF VOICE FREQUENCY TUNING IS
ENABLED BUT NO A750 VDR IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR
in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or
with DISABLE in the VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on
the VHF CONFIG page.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO AIR
PHONE IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in
the AIR PHONE field or with DISABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page.
CDU 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT
FMS 1 OR MCDU 1 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for FMS 1 or MCDU 1, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 1 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 517
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
CDU 2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT
FMS 2 OR MCDU 2 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for FMS 2 or MCDU 2, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 2 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
CDU 3 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT
FMS 3 OR MCDU 3 IS NOT CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and
receive ports for FMS 3 or MCDU 3, as appropriate, or
with NONE in the CDU 3 GRAPHICS DISP ON field
on the GRAPHICS setup page.
AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE
DISABLED AND NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with
LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES
DISPLAY 2 in the correct PORT n field on the SERIAL
setup pages or with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page.
A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE
DISABLED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with the
correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or
with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES
DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL
setup pages.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO
SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-
RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct
PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages and with the
correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or
with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL
CONFIG 1/2 page.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND A
SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO CDU IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with the correct value in the
appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s) on
the GRAPHICS setup page or with DISABLED in the
WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and
with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES
DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL
setup pages.
WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND AT
LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS BUT NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-
RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct
PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages or with
DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG
1/2 page and with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS
DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page.
AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR
GRAPHICS AND A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES
DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER
MAPS ARE DISABLED.
Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX
MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with
NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON fields on the
GRAPHICS setup page and with no PORT n field as
LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES
DISLAY 2 on the SERIAL setup pages.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 518
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
HR-1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT
NO HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 1
serial port or remove HR1 from the GRAPHICS setup
configuration.
HR-2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT
NO HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED.
Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 2
serial port or remove HR2 from the GRAPHICS setup
configuration.
HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-1 IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with a HR1 on the
GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 1
from the SERIAL configuration.
HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS
CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-2 IS CONFIGURED
FOR GRAPHICS.
Configure UniLink either with a HR2 on the
GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 2
from the SERIAL configuration.
PRE-DEPARTURE CLEARANCE IS ENABLED
BUT NO VALID AIRCRAFT TYPE IS PRESENT.
Configure UniLink either with a valid four-character
ICAO aircraft type designator in the TYPE field on the
A/C CONFIG page or with DISABLED in the
PREDEPARTURE field on the CLEARANCES page.
A750 VDR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED
TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is
configured to A750 VDR, to HIGH speed.
A429 TRANSMIT PORT SET TO A750 VDR
AND VM CMC
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port to either A750
VDR or VM (Vibro-Meter) CMC.
A
RINC 429 PORTS CONFIGURED FOR ARINC
750 VDR BUT VHF RADIO TYPE NOT SET TO
ARINC 750 VDR
Configure RADIO TYPE to A750 VDR.
VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO ARINC 750 VDR
BUT NO ARINC 429 PORTS ARE
CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 750 VDR.
Configure ARINC 429 transmit and receive ports to
A750 VDR.
VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO A750 VDR AND
VDR MODE-SELECT DISCRETE IS
CONFIGURED BUT THE DISCRETE ACTIVE
STATE IS NOT SET TO OPEN
If an A750 VDR is installed and VDR voice select
discrete is configured, set the discrete ‘active’ state to
‘OPEN’.
VHF RADIO CONFIGURED BUT ICAO
AIRCRAFT ADDRESS MISSING
Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address,
which ranges from 00000001 octal through 77777776
octal and is normally included on the aircraft
registration document.
ILLEGAL ICAO AIRCRAFT ADDRESS Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address,
which ranges from 00000001octal through 77777776
octal and is normally included on the aircraft
registration document.
FANS DISABLED – NO VALID AIRCRAFT
REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft
registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C
CONFIG page or with FANS as DISABLED.
FANS DISABLED – VHF RADIO OR SDU NOT
CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink with a VHF radio and/or an SDU, or
do not configure FANS.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page 519
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Configuration Error Messages
Text Action
FANS DISABLED – ATC DATABASE NOT
INSTALLED
Configure UniLink with FANS functionality ENABLED
and load a valid ATC database or configure UniLink
with FANS disabled.
FANS DISABLED – DUAL UASC FMS NOT
CONFIGURED
Configure UniLink for two UASC FMSs or configure
UniLink with FANS disabled.
SQP MIN IS SET BELOW THREE Configure SQP MIN with a value greater than three.
SQP THRESHOLD IS BELOW ONE OR ABOVE
EIGHT
Configure the SQP threshold with a value greater than
one but less than eight.
CVR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED
TRANSMIT PORT.
Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is
configured to CVR, to HIGH speed or assign the CVR
to a high speed port.
NOTE 1: If an MCDU is wired and configured as an ARINC 739A MCDU, which does not display
graphics, a low-resolution MFD-640 or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R must also be
configured in order to display graphics. If an MCDU is wired and configured as a UASC FMS
CDU, the MCDU is able to receive graphics and, therefore, no other device is necessary to
display graphics.
NOTE 2: A low-resolution MFD-640 and high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R are configured on the
GRAPHICS setup page in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s).
NOTE 3: The SQP threshold is the difference between the SQP of the currently tracked ground station
and the value of the SQP of another ground station necessary to initiate a handoff.
D. Hidden Error/Status Messages
Hidden Error/Status Messages
Text Action/Description
UNKNOWN ERROR Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists
contact UASC.
THE PORTION OF FLASH MEMORY CONTAINING
THE MTBF COUNTER HAS BEEN CORRUPTED
AND THE MTBF COUNT IS NO LONGER VALID
Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists
contact UASC.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A1-1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Appendix 1
This appendix contains industry-standard acronyms, abbreviations, and terms used in the UniLink
Installation manual.
1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description
ACARS Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting
System
ACK Acknowledgment
ADC Air Data Computer
ADS-C Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract
AFN ATS Facilities Notification
ALT Altitude
ALTRV Altitude Reservation
AOA ACARS Over Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC)
AOC Aeronautical (Airline) Operational Control
ARINC Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated (Data Interface Format
Standard
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information System (see D-ATIS)
ATM Air Traffic Management
ATN Aeronautical Telecommunications Network
ATS Air Traffic Services
AVLC Aviation VHF Link Control
BCS Block Check Sequence
CDA Current Data Authority
CDB Customer Database
CDU Control Display Unit
Circuit Mode Data A full duplex bi-directional communication link in which
data is transmitted and received simultaneously. A hand
shake must be established prior to data being exchanged.
Supported by a UniLink RS-232 port configured for TEL.
CLX Clearance
CM Configuration Module
CMU Communication Management Unit
CNS Communication Navigation Surveillance
COMM Communication (also referred to as COM)
CPDLC Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A1-2
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSDB Commercial Standard Data Bus (Data Interface Format
Standard)
CTS Clear to Send
CVFDR Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder (UASC)
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder
D-ATIS Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (also
referred to as ATIS)
DEPT CLX Departure Clearance
DLSP Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DSP)
DM Downlink Message
DP Display Processor
DPSK Differential Phase Shift Keying
DTU Data Transfer Unit (UASC)
DTU-100 Data Transfer Unit-100 (UASC)
DSP Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DLSP)
EFB Electronic Flight Bag
EFI Electronic Flight Instrument
EFI-890R Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (UASC)
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD Estimated Time of Departure
EXP Expected
EUROCAE European Organisation For Civil Aviation Equipment
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FANS Future Air Navigation Systems
FL Flight Level
FLT NO Flight Number
FMC Flight Management Computer (UASC)
FMS Flight Management System (UASC)
FPL Flight Plan
FREQ Frequency
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
GND SPD Ground Speed
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS Global Positioning System
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A1-3
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description
HS High Speed
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
ID Identification, Identifier
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IOP Input/Output Processor
I/O Input/Output
LAN Local Area Network
LOS Line of Sight
LRU Line-Replaceable Unit
LS Low Speed
LSK Line Select Key
MARSA Military Assumes Responsibility for Separation of Aircraft
MCDU Multifunctional Control Display Unit (UASC)
MCDU Multi-Purpose Control Display Unit (ARINC)
MCU Modular Concept Unit
MDM Modem
MFD Multifunction Display
MIC Microphone
MSG Message
MSK Minimum Shift Keying
MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules
ND Navigation Display
NDA Next Data Authority
NOCOMM No Communication
NO CVG No Coverage
NVM Non-volatile Memory
ONBD Onboard
OOOI Out, Off, On, In (used to detect and report changes to the
major flight phases of the aircraft)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A1-4
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description
Packet Mode Data A half duplex bi-directional communication link in which
data is accumulated in packets of various lengths and sent
out in a burst or bursts so therefore does not support voice
communications. Packet switching is the process of routing
and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that
a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet
only. Upon completion of the data transfer, the channel is
made available for the transfer of other traffic. Supported
by a UniLink ARINC port configured to provide VHF and
SAT capability.
PDC Pre-departure Clearance
PFD Primary Flight Display
PIREP Pilot Weather Report
POA Plain Old ACARS
POS Position
PTT Push-to-Talk
RCDU Remote Control Display Unit
RCVD Received
RF Radio Frequency
RPTS Reports
RTS Request to Send
RQD Required
RTE Route
RX Receive
SAT Abbreviation for Satellite Communications Link. The SAT
link provides communication via Iridium Short Burst Data
(SBD) and packet mode data Inmarsat equipment that
utilizes a specific satellite constellation.
SatCom Satellite Communications
SCN Software Control Number
SDU Satellite Data Unit
SELCAL Selective Calling
SIGMET Significant Meteorological Information
SITA Society of International Aeronautical Telecommunications
(Societe Internationale de Telecommunications
Aeronautiques)
SQP Signal Quality Parameter
SSDTU Solid State Data Transfer Unit (UASC)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A1-5
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description
TEL Abbreviation for telephony. The telephony communication
link provides a circuit mode data connection via a dial-up
modem. A hand shake must be established prior to data
being exchanged. Only an RS-232 capable SatCom can be
used.
TWIP Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
TX Transmit
UASC Universal Avionics Systems Corporation
UL UniLink (UASC)
UM Uplink Message
Unverified Message An Unverified message is one that does not contain
safeguards to prevent data corruption during transmission.
Such messages are labeled AOC on the page in which they
are displayed. See Verified Message.
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
VDL VHF Digital Link
VDR VHF Data Radio
Verified Message A Verified message is one that has been safeguarded
against potential data corruption during transmission and is
determined to be error-free using CRC code comparisons
and validity indicators. See Unverified Message.
VHF Very High Frequency terrestrial-based packet mode. This is
a data communications link used for obtaining textual
weather, D-ATIS, and the transmission of position
reporting, OOOI, and safety services communications
(UniLink Flight Information Services). Does not support
weather graphics.
VOX Voice
VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
WOW Weight On Wheels
WPT Waypoint
WX Weather
XMT Transmit
XOFF Transmission Off
XON Transmission On
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Appendix 2
This appendix contains UniLink Menus and subordinate menus. Pages illustrated with dashed boxes
are optional and are only available when the functionality reflected on the pages is enabled via
UniLink-configured options.
1. UniLink Menus and Submenus – without FANS
A. UniLink Menu 1/2
NOTES:
1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration.
2. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration.
3. Only available if DATA is enabled in configuration.
4. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-2
23-20-06 15 December 2011
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-3
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. UniLink Menu 2/2
NOTES:
1. Check with DSP for availability of this feature.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-4
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. Maintenance Menu
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-5
23-20-06 15 December 2011
D. Configuration Menu
I/O CONFIG
GRAPHICS
DISC IN
DISC OUT
ARINC RX
ARINC TX
SERIAL
POS REPORT
VHF CONFIG
SAT CONFIG
PRIORITY
TEL CONFIG
REVIEW
AiRCRAFT
CLEARANCES
ALERTS
SYS CONFIG
2/4
SYS CONFIG
3/4
SYS CONFIG
4/4
MAINTENCE
1
/
3
(continued from
previous page)
SYS CONFIG
1/4
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-6
23-20-06 15 December 2011
2. UniLink Menus and Submenus – with FANS
A. UniLink Menu 1/2
UNILINK
MENU
D-ATIS
TWIP
DEPARTURE
CLX
OCEANIC
CLX
OCEANIC
CLX ATC
VERIFY
MSGS
PUSHBACK
CLX
EXP TAXI CLX
ATC
EMERGENCY
ATC LOG ON
2/2
ATC LOG ON
1/2
ATC REVIEW
(PAN)
ATC REVIEW
(MAYDAY)
ATC
FLIGHT INFO
ATC REVIEW
(Cancel
Emergency)
ATC LOG ON
TO
(LOG ON TO Region
pages including:
-N PACIFIC
- S PACIFIC
-ASIA
- INDIAN OCEAN
- N ATLANTIC
- S ATLANTIC
- EUROPE)
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-7
23-20-06 15 December 2011
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-8
23-20-06 15 December 2011
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-9
23-20-06 15 December 2011
UniLink Menu 1/2 – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration (UL-800 only).
2. Only available if SAT is enabled in configuration.
3. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-10
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. Maintenance Menu
BCST DATA
SOURCE FMS
VERSIONS
SENSORS 1/2 DISCRETES
MAINTENANCE
1/3 DEVICES
UNILINK
MENU
Continued
GRAPHICS
DISC IN
DISC OUT
ARINC RX
ARINC TX
SERIAL
SYS CONFIG
1/4
POS REPORT
VHF CONFIG
SAT CONFIG
PRIORITY
TEL CONFIG
REVIEW
SENSORS 2/2 VDR STATUS
I/O CONFIG
ERROR LOG
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-11
23-20-06 15 December 2011
B. Maintenance Menu – Continued
Includes Configuration Menu choices
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-12
23-20-06 15 December 2011
C. OPS Menu
NOTES:
1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration.
2. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A2-13
23-20-06 15 December 2011
OPS Menu – Continued
NOTES:
1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration.
2. The SELCAL option only displays when associated messages are
available. Check with DSP for availability of this feature.
UL-801 Installation Manual
Page A3-1
23-20-06 15 December 2011
Appendix 3
This appendix contains a list of Datalink Service Providers (DSP) that may be used with the
UniLink.
1. Datalink Service Providers
Providers Contact Information
ARINC Direct https://direct.ARINC.net
Honeywell OneLink Aero-I and Aero-M Communication Services 941-360-0680 (24 hr.)
602-822-7502 (Fax)
Aviation.Services@Honeywell.com
Sat Com Direct 888-448-9003
321-777-3000
321-777-3702 (Fax)
SATCOM1 + 45 4615 4546
http://satcom1.com/
Sita http://www.sita.aero/
Universal Weather and Aviation 801-231-5600
713-944-1622
713-943-4610 (Fax)

Navigation menu